JP2017164092A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a game area in which balls can flow down; storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing entering balls; specific ball entry means in which privilege advantageous to a player is granted based on entry of game balls; operation means that the player can operate; storage control means for varying the storage means from a storage state capable of storing balls to a cancellation state for canceling the storage state, based on operation to the operation means; varying means capable of varying to a first state in which balls flowing out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by varying to the cancellation state by the storage control means and a second state in which the balls that flow out hardly enter the specific ball entry means; and variation control means for performing variable control of the varying means according to a predetermined variation pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device that can hold a game ball launched on the game board is provided, and when the player performs a release operation, the game ball held in the holding device flows down to the entrance. Some have a configuration. In this conventional game machine, it is possible to determine the timing for the player to flow down the game ball held in the holding device. As a result, interest was improved.

JP 2006-95235 A

  However, further improvement of interest is required.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a game area in which a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the ball that has entered, and the game ball enters. Based on the above, a specific ball entry means that gives a privilege advantageous to the player, an operation means operable by the player, and a storage state in which the ball can be stored based on an operation on the operation means The storage control means for changing the storage state to the release state for releasing the storage state, and the ball flowing out from the storage means by changing to the release state by the storage control means enters the specific entrance means Variable means capable of changing between a first state that is easy to play and a second state in which the flowed ball is difficult to enter the specific entry means, and a variable that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. Control means A.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the main control means for executing control of the game and the slave control means for executing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means. And the main control means generates variable control information for notifying the slave control means of the storage control means, the variable control means, and the control contents of the variable control means. Generating means, and the sub-control means is variable information in which variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled is displayed. Based on the variable control information output from the storage means and the main control means, the variable control status specification for specifying the variable control status of the variable means using the variable information stored in the variable information storage means Means, Based on the variable control situation specified by the variable control situation specifying means, the effect setting means for setting the effect to be displayed on the display means, and the effect execution means for executing the effect set by the effect setting means It has.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the variable control information generating means includes at least the variable means in the variable control information generated first after power is turned on to the gaming machine. This includes start timing information for starting the variable operation.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the main control means is an operation start period from when power is turned on to the gaming machine until the variable action of the variable means starts. Operation start period setting means capable of setting different periods is provided.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the main control means includes a plurality of the variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means. The variable control includes: stored storage means; and initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern to be executed first from among the plurality of variable patterns when power is turned on to the gaming machine. The means repeatedly executes the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means in a predetermined order, and the variable control information generation means generates the game machine first after power is turned on. The variable control information includes at least initial variable pattern setting information set by the initial variable pattern setting means.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a game area based on the game area in which the ball can flow down, the storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the ball that has entered, and the game ball entering the game Based on a specific ball entry means to which a privilege advantageous to the user is given, an operation means operable by the player, and an operation on the operation means, from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the storage state The storage control means for changing to a release state for releasing the ball, and a first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means Variable means that can be changed to a second state in which the spilled ball does not easily enter the specific entry means, and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. It is what you have.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, it has a main control means for executing game control, and a sub control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, wherein the main control means is the storage control means. And variable control information generating means for generating variable control information for notifying the slave control means of the control content of the variable control means, the slave control means having a predetermined control Display means for producing an effect, variable information storage means for storing variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled, and the variable control information output from the main control means On the basis of the variable information stored in the variable information storage means, the variable control status specifying means for specifying the variable control status of the variable means, and the variable control specified by the variable control status specifying means Based on the situation, the effect setting means for setting an effect to be displayed on said display means, and has a presentation execution means for executing said effect set by the rendering setup means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the control load of the main control means can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the variable control information generating means includes at least start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means in the variable control information generated first after power is turned on to the gaming machine.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the specific precision of the variable control condition by a sub control means can be raised.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, the main control means has an operation start period setting means capable of setting a different period as an operation start period from when the gaming machine is powered on until the variable means starts the variable operation. .

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the second to fourth aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, the main control means is executed first when a storage means storing a plurality of variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means and when a power supply is turned on to the gaming machine. Initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern from among the plurality of variable patterns, wherein the variable control means sets the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means in a predetermined order. The variable control information generation means is repeatedly executed, and the variable control information generating means sets at least the initial variable pattern setting set by the initial variable pattern setting means to the variable control information generated first after the game machine is turned on. It contains information.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the front view which expanded the lower right area | region (III part in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the case where the upper limit number of balls are stored in the storage device, (b) is the first storage device in the released state, and the movable valve is in the induction state ( It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the case where it became a protrusion state. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the case where a 1st storage device was a cancellation | release state and a movable valve was in a control state (immersion state), (b) is a storage state in which a 1st storage device is a storage state. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the case where a 2nd storage apparatus will be in a cancellation | release state. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the storage valve solenoid in case the 1st storage device becomes a cancellation | release state and a 2nd storage device will be in a storage state, (b) is a 1st storage device in a storage state. It is the schematic diagram which showed operation | movement of the storage valve solenoid in case a 2nd storage apparatus will be in a cancellation | release state. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a timing chart showing the relation between the operation of the second frame button (release button) and various devices. It is the timing chart which showed the point which sets the timing which operates a 2nd frame button (button for cancellation | release) in a timing effect (operation effect). (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in the announcement effect performed in the round before a timing effect (operation effect) is performed, (b) is a timing effect (operation effect). It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in it. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in a timing effect (operation effect). (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in the timing effect (operation effect) performed during the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in the timing effect (operation effect) performed during the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot decision display screen. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content which sets the display position of a display pointer based on the timing which can enter a specific general entrance, and the music information performed by a timing effect (operation effect). It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content of the difficulty selection screen which selects the difficulty performed in the 1st round of a jackpot game. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the shielding state of the cover member, FIG.18 (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the permeation | transmission state of the cover member. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second per random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normality typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability variation and time reduction, and (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for chances. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the movable valve action scenario storage area | region, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the movable valve action scenario table. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of various counters. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the movable valve operation scenario. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the music information storage area typically. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the start winning process which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the storage control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the storage valve operation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the movable valve control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the movable valve state command process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the storage apparatus related process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot effect processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the ball | bowl passage monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the lamp output process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the timing production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot timing effect presetting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a normal timing effect executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the prior setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the timing effect common setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the timing effect correction process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the movable valve action counter update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the front view which expanded the lower right area | region (III part in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which planarly viewed the 1st frame button and the 2nd frame button, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the interlocking operation structure of the 1st frame button and the 2nd frame button. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the state which pressed down the 1st frame button in the cancellation | release state in which the interlocking means is buried, (b) is a 1st frame button in the interlocking state where the interlocking means protrudes. It is the schematic diagram which showed the state pressed. It is the schematic diagram which showed the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the state which a player operates a frame button unit, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the frame button unit. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the state which operated (pressed down) the frame button unit in the state which controlled the pressing operation of the 2nd frame button among frame button units, (b) is a frame button unit. It is the schematic diagram which showed the state which operated (pressed down) the frame button unit in the state which canceled the pressing operation of the 2nd frame button. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is provided in a lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are schematic views showing a spherical flow inside the board surface unit 700, and FIG. 6 is a storage valve solenoid provided in the board surface unit 700. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, a first entrance 64, a second entrance 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device 65, and the like can be attached to and detached from the inner frame 12 from the front side. It is attached to. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 19) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate are set on the side where the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The unit 15 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened. . On the other hand, on the right side of the lower tray unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51, the ball launch unit 112a is driven. The touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing during the pressing operation period, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by a change in electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  A first frame button (effect button) 22a is provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15, and a second frame button (release button) 22b is provided above the lower plate. The first frame button 22a is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, and the second frame button 22b is, for example, a storage, which will be described later. It is operated by the player when releasing the storage state of the devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771). In this way, a plurality of frame buttons (first frame button 22a and second frame button 22b) that can be operated by the player are arranged at the center and the left side of the pachinko machine 10, so that they are arranged on the right side of the pachinko machine 10. The frame button can be easily operated even when the operation handle 51 provided is being operated (a state where the player is operating the operation handle with the right hand).

  In addition, a ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower portion of the lower plate 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general entrance 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the panel 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a start port or the like is disposed, Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or a winning port (entrance port).

  In this pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side in the front view of the game board 13) is formed as the left game area, the right side is formed as the right game area, and a game that launches a ball aiming at the left game area (hereinafter referred to as “the game board 13”). In the left-handed game, a game in which a ball is entered into the general entrance 63 or the first entrance 64 is performed, and a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). ), A game in which the launched ball passes over the variable display device unit 80 and aims at the board unit 700 provided in the right game area is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the game is suppressed from becoming monotonous by causing the player to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state. A detailed description of the board unit 700 provided in each gaming state and in the right gaming area will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 19) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (normally When passing the (entrance entrance) 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are three types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack C”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to the results of the jackpot game Value (game value) is given to the player. The three types of “big hits A to C” are determined when a big hit is made in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. A lottery that is a type of jackpot to be obtained and executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (hereinafter referred to as the first special symbol lottery), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. And the lottery executed on the occasion of entering the ball (hereinafter referred to as a lottery of the second special symbol) is configured so that the ratio selected when winning the jackpot is different.

  When the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (normal entrance) 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric ball 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is changed. Opened. In addition, at the normal time, since the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, when the normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  Also, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 30 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery is performed. A normal symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 while the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol. While being displayed by the display device 37, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67 remains, a lottery of the next ordinary symbol is performed and according to the lottery. The variable display is started.

  As described above, there are three types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack C”. When the “big hit A” and the “big hit C” are reached, a special game state (16 rounds big hit) with 16 rounds is set. On the other hand, when “big hit B” is reached, a special gaming state (8 round big hit) with 8 rounds is set. Further, when “big hit B” and “big hit C” are reached, the state shifts to a high probability state (the special symbol is undergoing a probable change) in which the special symbol jackpot probability increases after the jackpot ends. In a gaming state to which a high probability state of a special symbol is given, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is also high, and the variation time of the normal symbol is short, that is, attached to the second entrance 640 The state where the electric accessory 640a to be opened is opened and a ball easily enters the second entrance 640 is also provided. The high probability state and short time state of this special symbol will continue until the next jackpot is won. On the other hand, when “big hit A” is reached, only the short-time state described above is given after the big hit. In this case, the short-time state continues after the jackpot ends until the special symbol variation ends 100 times (until the 101st variation starts).

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called “high probability state of a special symbol” (special symbol probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). Also, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol high probability state) means that the normal symbol hit probability is increased and the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. An easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (ordinary symbol low probability state), which is a normal symbol hit probability normal state, that is, shorter than the short-time state Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probability change period. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot varies according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. Further, instead of changing the period of time when the “normal symbol is in a short time state”, the electric accessory is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or at the time of one ordinary symbol. The number of times may be changed. In the present embodiment, the bonus granted after the jackpot ends is determined according to the jackpot type. For example, after the jackpot ends, the ball passes a specific area (V winning switch) during the jackpot. You may make it give the probability change state of a special symbol, and the short time state of a normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the probability variation state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won, but the special symbol variation number after the jackpot ends is a predetermined number ( For example, every time a special symbol is changed, the probability change state of the special symbol continues or the special symbol changes from the probability change state of the special symbol to the normal state of the special symbol. The probability change state of the special symbol may be continued for a period until it is executed and the lottery is won. Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol time-short state is given during the special symbol probability change state, but the normal symbol time-short state is not given even during the special symbol probability change state (so-called latency). (Probability change state) may be provided.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball that has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is held up to four times for each entrance, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, you may set so that it may hold | maintain until the number which totaled the number of entrance to a some entrance is the upper limit number (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are being hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (special symbols corresponding to the jackpots A to D) (First symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general entrances 63 through which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. In addition, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to move. Here, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 11) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . If there are a plurality of holding balls, a lottery is executed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not yet been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image. In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with different types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) that are likely to be selected in accordance with the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery is easily executed in the current gaming state. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to be executed in the current gaming state is executed is displayed.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display region Dm are displayed for the small right region Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and When a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the number of times of entering the ball is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is It is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol (second symbol) displayed in the lower half The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 is being executed. The normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by the lighting state as a stop symbol after the end of the change.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through either the left or right through gate (normal entrance) 67, the symbol “◯” as the normal symbol (second symbol) Fluctuation display is performed in which “x” symbols are alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is only for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above and also on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Lights up. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is limited to 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The first entrance 64 is a case where a right-handed game is performed when a ball is launched into the left path of the variable display device unit 80 (when a left-handed game is performed). It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball.

  On the other hand, a board unit 700 is disposed below the right area of the game board area. The board surface unit includes a through gate (ordinary entrance) 67, a second entrance 640, a variable prize winning device 65, a specific general entrance 630, and a storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device). 771) is arranged (see FIG. 3). A cover member 710 is provided in a part of the board surface unit 700 so that a specific flow path in the board surface unit 700 (a flow path through which a sphere stored in the storage device flows down) is difficult to visually recognize from the outside. It is configured.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the board unit 700 disposed in the lower right region of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the lower right area of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 700 includes an inlet 700 a that opens upward so that a ball that flows down the right game area of the game board 13 can flow in, and a ball that flows in from the inlet 700 a. Among them, a flow for discharging the balls that have not entered the respective entrances (specific general entrance 630, second entrance 640, specific prize entrance 65a) provided in the board unit to the outside of the board unit 700. A box-shaped unit body having an outlet 700b.

  In the board surface unit 700, a through gate (ordinary entrance) 67 is provided on the lower side of the inlet 700a, and most of the spheres that flow into the board unit 700 from the inlet 700a are through gates (ordinary entrance). Mouth) 67 is configured to pass. Below the through gate 67, an electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is disposed, and a sphere that has flowed down the distribution channel 700d formed on the left side of the electric accessory 640a enters the ball. The variable winning device 65 and the base unit 760 are disposed at possible positions. And the specific general entrance 630 is arrange | positioned in the position where the ball | bowl which flowed down the flow path 700e for storage formed in the upper surface of the base unit 760 can enter. It is designed so that when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630, 15 prize balls more than the general entrance are paid out.

  Next, various devices provided in the panel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, a first flow path 641b and a second flow path 642b are provided as flow paths for guiding the sphere to the second entrance 640, and the sphere flows into the first flow path 641b. An open state in which the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a for allowing the sphere to flow into the second flow path 642b can receive the sphere, and a closed state in which it is more difficult to receive the sphere than the open state. The electric accessory 640a is provided so as to be variable.

  In addition, when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, the upper surface is formed so as to be a flow path through which the sphere can flow, and the first opening 641a is formed on the upstream side of the flow path. The second opening 642a is configured to cover each downstream side. The electric accessory 640a is composed of a single plate-like member driven by a driving means (solenoid or the like) (not shown). When the driving means is changed to the open state, the first opening 641a and the second When both of the openings 642a are in the open state and are changed to the closed state, both the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a are in the closed state. In addition, the upper surface flow path of the electric accessory 640a has a downward slope so that the lower left direction in front view of the game board 13 is on the downstream side, whereby the right side of the electric accessory 640a (from the viewpoint of FIG. 3). The second opening 642a is configured to be on the downstream side of the first opening 641a provided on the right side.

  Next, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 640a and the flow of the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 will be described by taking, as an example, a short time state of a normal symbol in which a ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. In the pachinko machine 10, in the short time state of the normal symbol, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1 second (see FIG. 38), and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 75%. Then, as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the short time state of the normal symbol, the operation of 1 second opening → 0.5 second closing → 1 second opening is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a is a crank having a step at a substantially central portion so that the downstream side covering the second opening 642a is lower than the upstream side covering the first opening 641a. It is configured in a shape, and is configured such that the time for the sphere to reach from the upstream part covering the first opening 641a to the downstream part covering the second opening 642a is about 0.6 seconds. With such a configuration, the timing at which the ball flows into the board surface unit 700 and reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, flows into the first opening 641a as it is. Then, the ball enters the second entrance 640 through the first flow path 641b and the combined flow path 641c. On the other hand, when the ball reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a flows down toward the downstream side (second opening 642a). Then, when the sphere that has flowed down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the downstream side (position covering the second opening 642a) of the electric accessory 640a (that is, 0. 6 seconds later), the electric accessory 640a performs the next opening operation, the ball flows into the second opening 642a, passes through the second flow path 642b and the combined flow path 641c, and enters the second entrance. Enter 640.

  As described above, each opening has a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 641b and second flow path 642b) for guiding the sphere to the second entrance 640 and allows the spheres to flow into the plurality of flow paths. Variable means (an electric accessory 640a) that changes a portion (the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a) between an open state in which a sphere can flow in and a closed state in which the flow of the sphere is more difficult than the open state In addition, each opening (first opening 641a, second opening 642a) for allowing the spheres to flow into the plurality of flow paths is located upstream and downstream of the flow path through which the spheres can flow down. Since the variable means (electric accessory 640a) is in the closed state, the ball that could not flow into the upstream opening (first opening 641a) is moved to the downstream opening (second opening). Part 642a).

  In addition, during the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow from the upstream position where the electric accessory 640a covers the first opening 641a to the downstream position where the second opening 642a is covered, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. Is designed to be longer than the closing interval period (0.5 seconds) executed during the opening period, the first opening at the timing of the closing interval period even though the electric accessory 640a is in the opening operation. The sphere that has reached the portion 641a and could not flow into the first opening 641a can surely flow into the second opening 642a.

  In addition, whether or not to open the electric accessory 640a during the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow from the upstream position covering the first opening 641a to the downstream position covering the second opening 642a. Since it is designed to be longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol for performing the lottery (0.5 seconds in the time reduction), the first opening 641a is reached during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the first opening A ball that could not flow into the portion 641a can be made to flow through the second opening 642a when the normal symbol lottery result is winning. Therefore, in a game state in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open (normal symbol time-short state), the player can efficiently enter the ball into the second entrance 640 only by always playing the right hand game. It is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

  Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 10, since the sphere that has flowed in from the inlet 700a of the board surface unit 700 is configured to flow down toward the electric combination 640a, the electric combination 640a is aligned after the flow of the spheres is aligned. It becomes possible to guide the sphere toward the upstream side of the. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball that does not enter the second entrance 640 is generated when the ball flowing down the game board 13 directly falls to the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for rolling from the position covering the first opening 641a to the position covering the second opening 642a is an interval period (0.5 second during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). ), Or about 0.6 seconds longer than the fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) of the normal symbol (second symbol). It is also possible to make it easier for a ball fired in a right-handed game during the variation of the symbol (second symbol) to enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10, the sphere that has flowed from the first opening 641 a has priority over the sphere that has flowed from the second opening 642 a, and enters the second entrance 640. It is configured as follows. More specifically, the spheres flowing in from the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a merge and flow in from the first opening 641a to the combined flow path 641c flowing down toward the second entrance 640. The first flow path 641b in which the sphere flows down is communicated in the directly upward direction, and the second flow path 642b in which the sphere flowing in from the second opening 642a flows down is communicated in the side surface direction. With this configuration, when a sphere flowing down the first flow path 641b and a sphere flowing down the second flow path 642b are generated at the same time, the first flow path 641b having a large kinetic energy (falling energy) is formed. The ball that has flowed down is preferentially guided to the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging in the combined flow path 641c due to the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641b and the sphere flowing down the second flow path 642b. Furthermore, the sphere that has flowed from the first opening 641a into which more spheres flow than the second opening 642a can smoothly enter the second entrance 640.

  The second flow path 642b, which is set to have a lower priority in the sphere flow than the first flow path 641b, has a length (35 mm in this embodiment) capable of retaining a plurality of balls (three in this embodiment). Even if the flow of the sphere stagnate by the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641b, the flow of the sphere into the second opening 642a is not hindered.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, since the short state of the normal symbol is reset and the normal state is set during the jackpot, the electric accessory 640a frequently opens during the jackpot, It is possible to prevent the situation where the ball does not reach the variable winning device 65 provided below the electric accessory 640a. In order to prevent the situation described above, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed, and the variable winning device 65 may be provided above the electric accessory 640a.

  The variable winning device 65 is provided with a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed in the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed so as to become a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  Next, the base unit 760 disposed in the panel unit 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the base unit 760 is disposed on the downstream side (outlet 700b side) of the panel unit 700 so that the storage channel 700e is formed on the upper side and the out channel 700f is formed on the lower side. Is provided.

  The base unit 760 is provided with a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 as storage devices for storing the spheres flowing down the storage channel 700e, and the storage device has a maximum of five spheres. It can be stored. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 9, the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b provided on the pachinko machine 10, Each time the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b, it is controlled to change from a storage state in which the balls are stored to a release state in which the storage state of the balls is released at a predetermined time difference. Each sphere is configured to flow down.

  On the storage channel 700e, there is a storage upper limit sensor S1 for detecting that the amount of stored spheres has reached the upper limit, and a storage detection sensor S2 for detecting the presence or absence of a sphere in the storage state. Is provided. Each of these sensors is formed by a non-contact detection proximity sensor that replaces the presence information of a sphere to be detected with an electrical signal by electromagnetic induction, so that the sensor is not damaged by the passage of the sphere.

  The configuration is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and may be any configuration as long as the storage status of the sphere on the storage channel 700e can be grasped. For example, as a sensor for detecting the sphere, a capacitance type, an ultrasonic type A proximity switch such as a photoelectric type or a magnetic type may be used, or a contact detection type switch such as a limit switch may be provided. Further, in order to grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 700e, sensors for detecting the spheres corresponding to the respective sphere storage positions (positions where the spheres shown in FIG. 3 are stored) are provided. A sensor may be provided so that the number of spheres flowing into the storage channel 700e and the number of spheres flowing out of the storage channel 700e can be counted, and the difference in the number is added to the storage channel 700e. You may make it grasp | ascertain the number of the ball | bowl currently stored.

  Further, the base unit 760 includes a guidance position (protruding position) for guiding the sphere that has flowed out of the storage channel 700e to the specific general entrance 630, and a regulation position that regulates guidance to the specific general entrance 630. A movable valve 750 that can be changed to (an embedded position) is provided, and is variably controlled based on a predetermined operation pattern (operation scenario). A detailed description of the movable control of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the part of the board unit 700 that is covered with the cover member 710 (see FIG. 2), the cover member 710 emits light from the back side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710) to the cover member 710. Transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiating, are provided. The transmissive lamps 227ba to 227be irradiate the cover member 710 with light so that the player can see the inside covered with the cover member 710. Although details will be described later, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the sphere flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the releasing operation of the storage device while grasping the operation state of the movable valve 750 during the normal game where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In addition, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down around the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is in a transmissive state, so that the player can visually recognize the situation where the ball flows down around the movable valve 750. Can do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 having the panel unit 700 configured as described above, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at a timing when the movable valve 750 enters a guidance state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entrance 630. As described above, the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) is operated by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage state of the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the release state. The balls stored in the storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can enter the specific general entrance 630. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and to actively participate in the game.

  In addition, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and the movable valve 750 among the operation contents is in the induction state (closed state). Most of the period is set as a period (0.1 second) in which only one sphere can be guided. Therefore, since accuracy is required for the timing at which the balls stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general entrance 630, it is more ambitious to the player. Can play a game.

  In the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, a specific general entrance ball one by one in the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771). Since it is configured to be able to flow down toward the mouth 630, the period during which only one sphere can be guided (0.1 seconds) continues as the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the guidance state (closed state). Is set in the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing. It becomes possible to make all the balls enter the specific general entrance 630. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the game in order to obtain more prize balls. The detailed contents of the operation (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 23.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operation state of the movable valve 750, the second frame button in a state where the operation state of the movable valve 750 is grasped. (Release button) The act of operating 22b can be prevented. Further, the cover member 710 that is a shielding means is a half mirror that switches to a transmissive state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is in a released state and the sphere flows down). Therefore, when the game ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is switched to the transmission state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the flow situation of the sphere flowing down near the movable valve 750.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 710 serving as a shielding unit is switched to a transmission state by irradiating light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. For example, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light applied to the cover member 710 from the light emitting means (LED) that is constantly lit is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which only the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside can be visually recognized, and a process for irregularly reflecting the irradiated light on the surface (for example, , Embossing). Thus, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 due to the light emitted from the decoration lamp 227a, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, the decoration In the state where the lamp 227a is not lit), the inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible. Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the store clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710.

  When such a configuration is used, a configuration is provided in which a shielding wall that shields the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a from being applied to the cover member 710 is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. It is good to provide. Thereby, even while the game is being performed, the player can visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710. Similarly to the first embodiment, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light is provided, and the light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that the inside of the cover member 710 May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which it is visible (a state in which light is not irradiated).

  Further, a decorative movable member is provided on the cover member 710 whose inside is visually recognized, and the operation of the movable member is controlled, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the operation of the decorative movable member is small). State) and a state in which the inside of the cover member 710 is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which there are many operations of the decorative movable member) may be switched.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, in this embodiment, the timing for releasing the second frame button (release button) 22 b is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750, and the first The three-symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is configured to display effects. As a result, the player can receive a privilege (a prize based on the entrance to the specific general entrance 630) by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the effect display executed by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Sphere) can be given, and the player can actively participate in the game.

  Next, the flow of a ball launched into the right game area by the right-handed game in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a board surface unit 700 is disposed in the right area of the pachinko machine 10, and the right game area can be obtained by right-handed game by the arrangement of nails provided above the inlet 700a of the board surface unit 700. About 95% (about 95 out of 100 balls) of the balls launched into the board surface 700 are arranged to flow into the inlet 700a of the board surface unit 700. Of the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that have not flowed into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700 (about 5 of the 100 shots) are formed between the variable display unit 80 and the board unit 700. The formed spherical flow path (see FIG. 2) flows down toward the out port 66.

  The flow of the sphere flowing into the inlet 700a of the board surface unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. Nails Qa and Qb are provided immediately below the inflow port 700a so that the balls flowing into the inflow port are distributed to the left and right at a ratio of about 1:14. The balls distributed to the right side of the nails Qa and Qb (about 90 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) pass through the through gate 67 and then the upstream portion (first opening 641a of the electric accessory 640a). The balls distributed to the left side of the nails Qa and Qb (about 5 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) pass through the first guide path 700c and move to the electric accessory 640a. It flows down to the downstream part (2nd opening part 642a). The nails Qa and Qb also serve as adjustable adjusting means, and can be adjusted to a desired ratio even if the ratio of distributing the balls to the left and right changes due to collision of the balls. As described above, the sphere that has flowed down to the upstream portion (position covering the first opening 641a) of the electric accessory 640a can flow into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a. Since it flows down on 640a, it becomes easier to enter the second entrance 640 than the ball that has flowed down to the downstream part (second opening 642a) of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, by adjusting the nails Qa and Qb which are the adjusting means, it is possible to adjust the rate at which the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640.

  The sphere that has reached the electric combination 640a flows into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a at the timing when the electric combination 640a is opened, and enters the second entrance 640. On the other hand, the sphere that has not flowed into the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a flows down from the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a to the sorting channel 700d. In the distribution flow path 700d, there are a direction in which the sphere flows down toward the variable winning device 65 (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3) and a direction of flowing down toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3). Nails Q1 to Q3 for distributing and a first adjusting member 701a are provided, and the balls (about 95 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) flowing into the distribution channel 700d are in a ratio of 9: 1. It is configured to distribute in the lower right direction and the lower left direction.

  Then, the balls distributed in the direction of flowing down the distribution channel 700d toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3) (about 10 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) Of these, about 1/3 of the spheres flow into the storage channel 700e, and the remaining about 2/3 of the spheres flow into the out channel 700f.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the balls launched by the right-handed game flow into the storage channel 700e at a rate of about one in every 30 balls. In other words, when the ball enters the specific general entrance 630, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is 15, so that the electric symbol 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the variable state is variable. Even if a game for entering a ball into the specific general entrance 630 is performed in a normal game state that is not a jackpot game state in which the opening operation of the winning device 65 is executed, the ball enters the specific general entrance 630 Since the number of balls required to make a ball (about 30 balls) is larger than the number of prize balls (15 balls) to be paid out when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630, the number of balls held will not increase. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal game in which a ball enters the specific general entrance 630 in a state where the operation content of the movable valve 750 is illegally grasped or the movable valve 750 is broken in the normal game state. .

  In the present embodiment, since the frequency of the balls flowing into the storage flow path 700e is suppressed by using the above-described board surface configuration, the jackpot state where the opening operation of the variable winning device 65 is performed, In the normal game state other than the short time state (normal symbol short time state) where the ball is likely to enter the ball opening 640, even if a right-handed game is performed, the number of held balls is prevented from increasing, but the storage channel 700e It is possible to increase the frequency of the spheres flowing into the game and make it easier for a game (a game to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b) to enter the sphere into the specific general entrance 630.

  Even in such a case, when the movable valve 750 is covered by the cover member 710 as in the present embodiment, it becomes difficult to grasp the operation state of the movable valve 750, and thus the number of balls in the normal gaming state increases. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sphere that has flowed down the electrically-powered article 640a that is in a closed state can flow into the storage channel 700e. In the short time state of the normal symbol that is easy, it is difficult for the ball to flow into the storage channel 700e, and in the big hit gaming state in which the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open, the ball easily flows into the storage channel 700e. Therefore, since the expected entry degree of the ball to the specific general entrance 630 can be varied according to the game state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has flowed down the distribution channel 700d is distributed to either the lower right direction where the variable winning device 65 is disposed or the lower left direction where the specific general entrance 630 is disposed. Therefore, even if the distribution ratio of the balls flowing down the distribution flow path 700d varies depending on individual differences and installation conditions of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an extremely disadvantageous game. Further, by making the specifications (arrangement) of the nails Q1 to Q3 and the first adjusting member 701a provided in the distribution channel 700d different, the ball enters the variable winning device 65 efficiently during the big hit game of the pachinko machine 10. A game specification that makes a ball and a game specification that makes it easy for a ball to enter the specific general entrance 630 during a jackpot game (that is, a ball is easily stored in the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771)). Can be provided to the player, and the player can select the pachinko machine 10 that plays the game based on his skill.

  Next, the operation of the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) provided in the base unit 760, the movable valve 750, and the spherical flow will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing a state in which the upper limit number of five spheres are stored on the storage channel 700e, and FIG. 4B shows the first storage device. It is the figure which showed typically the case where 770 is a cancellation | release state and the movable valve 750 will be in the induction | guidance | derivation state (protrusion state). FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing the case where the first storage device 770 is in the released state and the movable valve 750 is in the restricted state (buried state). FIG. 5B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the storage state and the second storage device 771 is in the release state. FIG. 6 is a schematic view schematically showing the operation mechanism of the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 and the second storage valve 771a of the second storage device 771, and FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the first storage device 770 is in the released state and the second storage device 771 is in the stored state, and FIG. 6B is the second state when the first storage device 770 is in the stored state. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the storage device 771 will be in a cancellation | release state.

  As shown to Fig.4 (a), the 1st storage valve 770a and the 2nd storage valve 771a are provided so that it may have the space | interval which can store one ball | bowl between them, and storage apparatus (1st storage apparatus 770 and In the state of FIG. 4A in which the upper limit number (5) of spheres are stored in the second storage device 771), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) stores one sphere, The second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is in a state of storing four balls. In such a state, the new sphere that has flowed down toward the storage flow path 700e is changed in the flow direction by the sphere stored in the storage flow path 700e, and the outflow provided below the base unit 760. It flows down toward the flow path 700f and flows out of the board unit 700 from the out flow path 700f.

  A first sphere passage sensor S3 that detects the passage of the sphere is provided in the flow destination of the storage channel 700e, that is, in a region where the sphere flows down when the first storage valve 770a is released. A second sphere passage sensor S4 for detecting the passage of the sphere is provided in a region downstream of the region where the first sphere passage sensor S3 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first storage device 770 is in the released state based on the detection results of the first ball passage sensor S3 and the second ball passage sensor S4 and the command indicating the entrance to the specific general entrance 630. The period until it passes through the specific area (specific general entrance 630 or second ball passage sensor S4) can be measured, and the first storage device 770 is released based on the measurement result. The content of the effect (the start timing of the effect, the effect period, and the effect content) to be executed after the state is reached (after the first sphere passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the sphere) is configured to be correctable.

  Here, the ball flowing down the game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a flow-down period of flowing down a specific section according to the installation state (tilt) of the pachinko machine 10, the outside air environment (temperature, humidity), and the dirt of the ball. Different. Therefore, in the case of performing an effect on the flow of a sphere, if a specific effect is executed based on a predetermined flow-down period, an error occurs between the result of the effect and the actual flow result of the sphere. There was a bug that it would end up. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to correct the content of the effect with respect to the flow of the sphere.

  As a result, the second frame button (for release) is set so that the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at a timing when the movable valve 750 is changed to a guidance state (protruding state) that can guide the ball to the specific general entrance 630. The notification timing of the effect for notifying the timing of operating the (button) 22b can be corrected based on the actual flow-down period of the ball, and the execution of the effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity can be suppressed. .

  In addition to the effects used in the present embodiment, for example, when the sphere has passed a predetermined position (for example, the first sphere passage sensor S3), the sphere has a specific position (for example, a specific general entrance). 630) is performed for a predetermined period of time, and when the result effect indicating the passing result of the sphere is executed after the roaring effect, the period of the roaring effect is set to the ball passing period actually required. It becomes possible to correct based on this, and it is possible to suppress the performance that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

  Specifically, in the case of executing an effect that satisfies the indicators set in a plurality of stages toward the final stage as the production effect, and performing an effect as to whether or not the final stage is reached as the result effect, By satisfying each of the staged indicators and varying the timing, or by varying the start timing of the roaring effect, the result effect is executed regardless of the stage of the roaring effect, or the roaring effect It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation of waiting for execution of the result presentation in a state where the final stage is reached.

  In addition to the first sphere passage sensor S3 or the second sphere passage sensor S4 described above, the detection results of the storage upper limit sensor S1 and the storage detection sensor S2 are used to enter the inside of the panel unit 700 (particularly, the storage channel 700e). It may be configured to determine whether or not a ball clogging or cheating is being performed.

  The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a storing the sphere on the storage flow path 700e are provided with a second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) provided on the pachinko machine 10. By operating (pressing down) and driving the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19), drive control is performed so that the spheres stored in the storage channel 700e flow down one by one. The details of the mechanism for operating the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a by driving the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19) will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the drive control contents of the 770a and the second storage valve 771a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, when the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) is operated in the state shown in FIG. 4A, first, the first storage valve 770a is released, and the first storage valve 770a and The ball stored between the second storage valve 771a passes over the first storage valve 770a in the released state and flows down in the downstream direction (see FIG. 4B). Since the sphere stored on the storage channel 700e is restricted from flowing downstream by the second storage valve 771a in the storage state, only one sphere is stored from the storage channel 700e. It will flow down in the downstream direction.

  When the ball flows down from the storage channel 700e with the movable valve 750 protruding (guided state), as shown in FIG. 4B, the movable valve 750 and the second adjustment member It flows down 701b and enters a specific general entrance 630 (see FIG. 4B). On the other hand, when a ball flows down from the storage channel 700e in a state where the movable valve 750 is buried (regulated state), as shown in FIG. 5A, the ball enters the specific general entrance 630. It flows out of the board surface unit 700 from the outlet 700b without balling.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that the player can release the storage of the ball by the storage device by operating (pressing) the operation means (second frame button (release button) 22b). The timing at which the player releases the storage of the ball by the storage device can be determined. In addition, the movable valve 750 is configured to variably operate between a protruding state (allowed state) and an embedded state (restricted state) in a predetermined operation pattern. Therefore, whether or not the ball enters the specific general entrance 630 is determined based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means (second frame button (release button) 22b). Therefore, the operation means can be operated eagerly, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early.

  When the player operates (presses) the second frame button (release button) 22b and the period in which the first storage valve 770a is in the released state has elapsed for a predetermined time (1 second in this embodiment), The first storage valve 770a is closed and the second storage valve 771a is released (see FIG. 5B). In this state, the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e by the second storage valve 771a flows down to a position where it comes into contact with the first storage valve 770a. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 0.5 second after the second storage valve 771a is released), the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the state shown in FIG. Migrate to

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 5 (b), the spheres (four) stored in the storage channel 700e by the second storage valve 771a have flowed down to the state stored by the first storage valve 770a. The second storage valve 771a is changed from the released state (buried state) to the closed state (projected state). Here, in this embodiment, since the 1st storage valve 770a and the 2nd storage valve 771a are provided with the space | interval (about 11 mm) for one ball | bowl, the 2nd storage valve 771a is 1st storage. Of the four spheres stored (damped) by the valve 770a, it protrudes to a position between the most downstream sphere and the second sphere from the most downstream. Therefore, the protruding operation of the second storage valve 771a can be executed smoothly.

  In the storage channel 700e, the region where the sphere is stored in a state where the second storage valve 771a protrudes (that is, the position from the position where the second storage valve 771a protrudes to the upstream end of the storage channel 700e). ) Is longer than the distance (about 47 mm) obtained by adding the thickness of the second storage valve 771a (left and right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 5B) (about 3 mm) to four balls (about 44 mm). The distance is shorter than five (about 55 mm) (in this embodiment, 50 mm).

  With this configuration, when the second storage valve 771a protrudes, the second storage valve 771a is stored in the storage channel 700e even if the sphere moves backward on the storage channel 700e by the thickness of the second storage valve 771a. It is possible to prevent the sphere from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e with the protruding operation of the second storage valve 771a. Further, it is possible to prevent the sixth sphere from being stored in the storage flow path 700e in a state where the second storage valve 771a is released (an embedded state). In order to prevent the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the operation of each storage valve, the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e is downstream of the upstream end of the storage channel 700e. You may provide the level | step difference from which the side becomes low. Thereby, it can suppress that the ball | bowl stored by the flow path 700e for storage overflows from the upstream end of the flow path 700e for storage by operation | movement of each storage valve.

  Next, a storage valve solenoid 770b for electrically driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction, and FIG. 6B schematically shows a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction. It is the schematic diagram shown. In the present embodiment, a plurality of variable members (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) are variably operated using a single electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). Specifically, the storage valve solenoid 770b is a two-way holding type self-holding solenoid.

  This two-way holding type self-holding solenoid combines a permanent magnet with an open frame solenoid, attracts the plunger by instantaneously energizing the coil, and holds the position after suction with the permanent magnet. A self-holding solenoid that does not need to be energized when holding the state after suction, and is provided with coils in the positive and negative directions around the permanent magnet, and each coil is energized to move the plunger in the positive or negative direction. Is a solenoid configured to be capable of holding the state after suction using a permanent magnet. Thus, using one solenoid, the three states of holding the plunger in the positive direction, sucking the plunger in the negative direction, and the initial state in which the plunger is not sucked in any of the positive and negative directions are maintained. Can do.

  In a state where the plunger is attracted in the forward direction by the storage valve solenoid 770b (a state where the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the forward direction), the first storage valve 770a is opened (see FIG. 6A). In the state where the plunger is sucked in the negative direction (the state where the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction), the second storage valve 771a is opened (see FIG. 6B). It is changed to the (released) state. Further, in a state where the storage valve solenoid 770b is not turned on in any of the positive and negative directions (off state), both the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are changed to the closed (non-released) state. It is constituted so that.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 6A, the first storage valve 770a and the storage valve solenoid 770b are combined by the first transmission means for transmitting the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b to the first storage valve 770a. Yes. The first transmission means has three gears and is assembled to the forward end portion of the plunger of the storage valve solenoid 770b. In addition, the second storage valve 771a is assembled at the distal end of the plunger in the negative direction side.

  Here, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the forward direction, the gear provided in the first transmission means rotates in accordance with the operation of the plunger sucked in the forward direction, and the rotation result of the gear is Based on this, the first storage valve 770a provided on the terminal side of the first transmission means (the side connected to the first storage valve 770a) is variably operated to the released (open) state, and the second storage valve 771a is in the forward direction. In accordance with the operation of the plunger sucked to the side, the tip portion protrudes on the storage flow path 700e and is variably operated in the closed (non-released) state (see FIG. 6A).

  On the other hand, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction, the first storage valve 770a is closed (not released) based on the operation of the plunger protruding in the negative direction as shown in FIG. 6B. The second storage valve 771a is variably operated to the released (open) state. Although illustration is omitted, in a state where the plunger of the storage valve solenoid 770b is not sucked in either the positive direction or the negative direction (normal state), both the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed ( It is variably operated so as to be in a non-released state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the plurality of variable members (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (the storage valve solenoid 770b). Therefore, the space for installing the electric drive source can be reduced, and the space of the apparatus can be saved. Further, by saving the space of the device, it becomes possible to install a decorative member and a device related to the game using the vacant space, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are not both opened (released) regardless of which state the storage valve solenoid 770b is in, the storage valve solenoid 770b Even if a failure occurs and a malfunction occurs, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the sphere continues to pass through the storage channel 700e. In addition, since it is configured to be variably operated only by one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b), when the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e are caused to flow down toward the specific general entrance 630 one by one. The variable operation control is executed only for the storage valve solenoid 770b, so that the variable operation control process is performed compared to the case where the variable operation control is executed for a plurality of electrical drive sources (solenoids and the like). The load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the plurality of variable members (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) are moved depending on the moving direction of the moving body (plunger) driven by one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). Although a configuration in which variable operation is performed is used, other configurations may be used as long as a plurality of variable members can be variably operated using a single electric drive source, for example, stepping as an electric drive source. A plurality of variable members may be variably operated at a predetermined timing in accordance with the rotation speed (number of steps) of the motor.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is used in which a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). An electric drive source may be provided for each variable member. In the present embodiment, the configuration for variable operation is different between the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, but the same variable operation configuration may naturally be used. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to execute variable operation control that causes the balls stored in the storage channel 700e to flow down toward the specific general entrance 630 one by one. A configuration may be used. For example, by continuously pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be simultaneously released (released). Operation control may be executed. Thereby, when performing normal operation with respect to the 2nd frame button (release button) 22b, variable operation control is performed with respect to each storage valve so that a ball flows out from storage channel 700e one by one, When a long press operation is performed on the second frame button (release button) 22b, the variable operation control is executed such that at least two or more balls stored on the storage channel 700e flow out. Therefore, the number or timing of the balls flowing out from the storage channel 700e can be varied depending on the player's operation content on the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can play the game with ambition. Can be made.

  Next, referring to FIG. 9, the operation control of the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 and the flow of the opening / closing operation of the movable valve 750 when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. explain. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b and various devices.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated, first, the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 is variably controlled to the release (open) state for 1 second. Then, the state shown in FIG. In this state, the sphere stored between the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a flows down from the storage channel 700e. Here, since the flow-down period of about 0.5 seconds is required for the ball that flows down when the first storage valve 770a is released (opened) to reach the movable valve 750, the first storage valve 770a Whether or not the ball is guided to the specific general entrance 630 is determined according to the operation state of the movable valve about 0.5 seconds after the release (open) state. In the operation example shown in FIG. 9, first, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state. Since the operation state of the movable valve 750 after 5 seconds is in the open state (restricted state) as shown in FIG. 9D, the ball does not enter the specific general entrance 630, and the board surface unit. It flows down from the outlet 700b of 700 to the outside of the panel unit 700.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), once the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated, as shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and (c), a total of 2 seconds of variable control is executed. While the variable control is being executed, the operation of the next second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted, so the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. When variable control of each storage device is executed, an operation invalid period during which the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted is set for about 2 seconds. Thereby, it can suppress that the next variable control will be started while the variable control of each storage device is performed.

  When 1 second has elapsed since the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is in the released (opened) state, the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is in the non-released (closed) state. (FIG. 9B), and the variable control is executed to change the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) to the released (open) state 0.5 seconds after that point (FIG. 9B). 9 (c)). And the cancellation | release (open) state of the 2nd storage apparatus 771 (2nd storage valve 771a) is continued for 0.5 second from the point, and as shown in FIG.5 (b) mentioned above, the 2nd storage apparatus 771 ( A period is provided for allowing the sphere stored by the second storage valve 771a) to flow down to a position where it comes into contact with the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 (FIG. 9C).

  That is, in this embodiment, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to cause one sphere to flow down toward the movable valve 750, and the second frame button (release button). Button) 22b is configured to execute the release operation of the storage device only once every 2 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, if the second frame button (release button) 22b is not operated (pressed) in a timely manner, the ball cannot enter the specific general entrance 630, and the second frame button ( The operation accuracy of the release button 22b is required. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed on the third symbol display device 81. The second frame button (release button) 22b is operated according to the timing effect (operation effect) so that the ball can easily enter the specific general entrance 630. Yes. Thereby, the player can be motivated to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

  In FIG. 9, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated and the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is changed to the release (open) state again, the operation timing is 0. Since the movable valve 750e is closed (guided) after 5 seconds, the ball flowing down toward the movable valve 750 by this operation is guided to the specific general entrance 630 by the movable valve 750 in the closed (guided) state. Is done.

  The movable valve 750 is variably controlled at all times according to a predetermined rule based on the power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. The variable control content is defined by combining a plurality of operation scenarios (see FIG. 23A) having different operation (variable) patterns, as will be described later. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b so that the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 variably controlled based on the operation scenario is in a closed (guidance) state in this way. , The ball is guided to a specific general entrance 630.

  Next, timing effects (operation effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the sphere stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is directed toward the movable valve 750 based on the operation on the second frame button (release button) 22b. It is configured to flow down. When the movable valve 750 arrives at the movable valve 750 when the movable valve 750 is in an open (restricted) state, the ball entry into the specific general entrance 630 is restricted. , It is configured to guide the entry of a sphere into the specific general entrance 630.

  The period during which the movable valve 750 is in the closed (guidance) state is set to a short period (for example, 0.1 second), and the player randomly operates the second frame button (release button) 22b. However, it is configured such that it is difficult to cause the balls stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) to enter the specific general entrance 630. Here, in the present embodiment, a timing effect (operation effect) is configured to be executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. The player can efficiently enter a ball into the specific general entrance 630 by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the contents of the timing effect (operation effect). Become.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a method for setting the timing for causing the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b in the timing effect (operation effect) described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing points for setting the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in the timing effect (operation effect). As described above, the movable valve 750 is configured to be variably controlled in accordance with a predetermined rule, and the storage flow path is based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. The sphere flowing down from 700e (see FIG. 3) toward the movable valve 750 is configured to reach the movable valve 750 after a flow-down period of about 0.5 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the variable control content of the movable valve 750 is read in advance, a point where the movable valve 750 is in a closed (guidance) state is specified (FIG. 10A), and the ball flow down period (0.5 seconds) from that point. ) Is subtracted from the point where the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 (FIG. 10B). In this way, by setting the timing at which the player can enter the ball and executing the effect of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the timing, the player can play the second frame button ( A ball can be entered into the specific general entrance 630 simply by operating the release button 22b. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that can give an advantageous privilege (prize ball) to the player, and the player can actively participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the possible entry timing set as a possible entry timing to the specific general entry entrance is 0.5 seconds before the timing at which the movable valve 750 is in the guiding state. Here, most of the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the guiding state is 0.1 second, so that the period during which the ball can be entered is set longer than the operation of the corresponding movable valve 750 is started. The previous period. Thereby, it can be made hard to notice that the timing effect performed based on the timing which can be entered is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since the movable valve 750 is operated based on a plurality of operation scenarios, the interval at which the movable valve 750 is in the induction state varies. Therefore, even if the operation of the movable valve 750 that is executed before the operation of the movable valve 750 that is referred to when setting the entering timing is matched with the entering timing, Based on this, the operating status of the movable valve 750 cannot be grasped. Therefore, it can be made difficult to notice that the timing effect executed based on the timing at which the ball can be entered is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750.

  In addition, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated and the first storage device 770 enters the released (opened) state, specifically, When the storage device 770 is in a released (open) state and the first sphere passage sensor S3 detects a sphere that has flowed out of the storage channel 700e, the transmission lamp 227b is lit. That is, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a timing when the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630, the ball that has flowed out of the storage channel 700e is the first ball. The inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible when it passes through the passage sensor S3 (timing 0.1 second after operating the second frame button 22b). Here, most of the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the guiding state is 0.1 second, and therefore, the timing at which the inside of the cover member 710 is visible is the movable that is the target of setting the ball entry-possible timing. The period before the operation of the valve 750 is started. Thereby, the operation state of the movable valve 750 is not grasped based on the timing when the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 17 described later, as a timing effect (operation effect), a display pointer that prompts the third symbol display device 81 to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. Is moved and displayed, and the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing when the display pointer reaches a specific position, so that the above-described entry possible timing and the second frame button (release button) 22b are operated. An effect that matches the operation timing is executed. Next, the content of the timing effect (operation effect) used in this embodiment will be described.

  First, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. Fig.11 (a) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in the notification effect performed in the round before a timing effect (operation effect) is performed, Comprising: FIG.11 (b)-FIG.12 ( b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the operation status for the operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b) are shown. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 that changes based on the operation of the operating means will be described with reference to the schematic diagram shown.

  As shown in FIG. 11, on the third symbol display device 81, a round number display unit 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the sub display area Ds2 suggests the number of balls acquired during the big hit. The acquisition display is executed, and in the sub display area Ds3, “Aim at the right” is displayed on the guidance display section for guiding the game method. Then, an acquisition number display mode 718 for indicating the number of balls acquired based on the winning of a ball at the specific winning opening 65a is displayed as “15” indicating the number of winning balls of the specific winning opening 65a. The number-of-acquisition display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of a ball to the specific winning opening 65a, and then moves and displays toward the sub display area Ds2, and finally, the sub display area It is added as an acquisition display of Ds2.

  In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) starts from the next round and a guidance display for informing the game performance of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . An effect area used for timing effects (operation effects) is displayed on the lower side of the screen. In this effect area, a left button display mode 715 with “left” added corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b and “middle” corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a. Are displayed, and sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 in which display pointers 719 (see FIG. 11B) are displayed are provided corresponding to the respective button display modes. .

  The sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5 are areas in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, as will be described later with reference to FIG. By operating the operation means (first frame button (production button) 22a or second frame button (release button) 22b) at the timing that coincides with the bar display unit 717, a successful production (FIG. 11B described later). )) Is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display unit 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 12B described later) is executed.

  Note that the timing at which the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 in the sub display area Ds4 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is the ball entry timing described above with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, while the notice effect is being executed, the characters “Waiting” are scroll-displayed from right to left in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5.

  As described above, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the present embodiment, an effect that causes the player to operate the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. The By configuring in this way, the number of times that the player can perform the button operation can be increased and the effect can be enhanced as compared with the case where the effect of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG.11 (b), the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in jackpot is demonstrated. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5, and at the timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display unit 717, the second frame button (for release) When the (button) 22b is operated, the word “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b indicates the display mode of the left button display mode 715. It is displayed by changing it. In this case, as the timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at the time when the ball can be entered, so that the ball flowing down from the storage device based on the operation is the specific general entrance port. 630 will be entered.

  The state shown in FIG. 12A is the first frame button (effect) at the timing when the display pointer 719c displayed in the sub display area Ds5 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a matches the bar display portion 717. Prize button obtained when the ball enters the specific general entrance 630 by operating the first frame button (production button) 22a at this timing. The specific acquisition number display mode 721 indicating the number is displayed, and the fact that the first frame button (effect button) 22a is operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the right button display mode 716.

  The state shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719h does not match the bar display unit 717 in the timing effect (operation effect). In the center of the screen, “bad” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the fact that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the left button display mode 715. The In this case, as the timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at a timing different from the timing at which the player can enter the ball. There is no entry into the general entrance 630.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the content of the timing effect (operation effect) performed during the special symbol variation display will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element as FIG.8 (b) mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the special symbol variation display, the same effect display as that during the jackpot is executed. In addition, about the display of a timing effect (operation effect), the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element similar to during a jackpot, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 13A, in order to notify the player of the timing when the timing effect (operation effect) is started, the display mode of “start” is scrolled and displayed. Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 13B, the ball has entered the specific general entrance 630 in the sub display area Ds2. An acquisition display (“15”) indicating a privilege (prize ball) given to the player is executed, and a display pointer 719 (719k to 719p) is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4 or Ds5.

  In the present embodiment, a display pointer that scrolls in the sub display area Ds4 (operation pointer 719q in the case of FIG. 14) in the timing effect (operation effect) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is changing. -719t) is operated at the timing when the second frame button (release button) 22b is matched with the bar display portion 717, the special symbol lottery result is displayed in the sub display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. It is configured as follows. By comprising in this way, the 2nd frame button (release button) 22b for canceling | releasing the storage state of a storage apparatus can be used in order to alert | report the lottery result of a special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the display contents of the jackpot confirmation display screen for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the special symbol lottery result has been won will be described. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot confirmation display screen that is displayed when the jackpot type is a jackpot type “Big Jack A”, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot decision display screen displayed when winning the jackpot of "C".

  Here, in this embodiment, as an operation pattern of the movable valve 750, an operation period (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an operation pattern (operation that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantage period) A disadvantage period during which the scenario is executed is set (see FIG. 23A described later), and the movable valve 750 is configured to execute a plurality of operation patterns (operation scenarios) in a predetermined order. (See FIG. 23B described later). Furthermore, the operation pattern (operation scenario) of the movable valve 750 to be executed in the future can be determined based on the operation state of the movable valve 750.

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, a period in which a jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed on the jackpot confirmation display screen informing the third symbol display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has been won. It is possible to determine whether the movable valve 750 is variably operated in an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and to notify the determination result on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed. The game can be motivated.

  In the example of the jackpot confirmation display screen shown in FIG. 15 (a), the jackpot type indicating that the jackpot type is the jackpot type “Big jackpot A”, that is, “Big jackpot” indicating that the jackpot is won for the 16th round jackpot that is not given a certain change state after the jackpot game ends. ”And the word“ chance ”is displayed as the movable valve advantageous period notification mode 721 for notifying that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game. .

  Further, in the example of the jackpot confirmation display screen shown in FIG. 15B, the jackpot type is a jackpot with a jackpot type of “jackpot C”, that is, a winner of the 16-round jackpot where a certain change state is given after the jackpot game ends, and Then, during the jackpot game, “super” is displayed indicating that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player.

  In this manner, in addition to the mode for notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, various patterns can be obtained by notifying the mode for notifying the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the jackpot on the jackpot confirmation display screen. Can be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG.16 and FIG.17, the setting method of the production | presentation aspect in the timing production (operation production) performed in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 16 schematically shows the contents of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing at which the player can enter the specific general entrance 630 and the music information executed in the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the present embodiment, information indicating the timing of entering the specific general entrance 630 described above with reference to FIG. 10, music information used for timing effects (operation effects), and timing effects The display position of the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 11B) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is determined based on the difficulty level setting information for setting the difficulty level of (operation effect).

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of pieces of music can be used in the timing effect (operation effect), and a place where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) is predetermined for each music. This is for operating the operation means at a timing according to the rhythm of each musical piece in the timing effect (operation effect). With this configuration, the display pointer is displayed at a timing at which a specific general entrance 630 can be entered. Even if 719 is set, the operation means can be operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing effect (operation effect), and the timing effect (operation effect) can be performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Can be executed.

  16A and the music B shown in FIG. 16B are different in the number and interval of the display pointers 719 that can be displayed (settable). The location to set will also be different. In the present embodiment, the difficulty level of the timing effect can be set. When a high difficulty level is selected, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the timing effect (operation effect). The display pointer for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b instead of setting the number of times that the display position of the display pointer 719 to be matched coincides with the timing at which the specific general entrance 630 can enter the ball. The effect mode is set so that it is difficult to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b in a state in which 719 matches the bar display unit 717 (see FIG. 11B). On the other hand, when the low difficulty level is selected, the display position of the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set to the specific general entrance 630 as compared with the case where the high difficulty level is selected. A state in which the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b coincides with the bar display unit 717 (see FIG. 11B) instead of setting the number of times that coincide with the timing at which the ball can be entered to be small. The production mode is configured so that the second frame button (release button) 22b can be easily operated.

  Specifically, when a low difficulty level is selected for the music piece A, as shown in FIG. 16A, a specific general entry among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b. The number of times that coincides with the timing at which the player can enter the mouth 630 is set to two, and further, five display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame buttons (effect buttons) 22a are set to be displayed.

  On the other hand, when the high difficulty level is selected for the music B, as shown in FIG. 16B, the display pointer 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is set to the specific general entrance 630. The number of matches with the timing at which the player can enter the ball is set to five, and further, eight display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a are displayed.

  Furthermore, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, when a high difficulty level is selected, the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed as a timing effect (operation effect) is higher than when a low difficulty level is selected. A display mode that is difficult to take timing is set.

  In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill, and different privileges are given to the various players according to the difficulty level. Thus, the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed eagerly.

  Moreover, although the content mentioned above was the content which showed both selection of the music and selection of the difficulty in the timing effect (operation effect) performed by this embodiment, it is only a music, without changing a difficulty level. Since the interval between the locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) is different between the music A and the music B, the player who wants to enjoy the timing effect (operation effect) with a space is selected. A player who selects A and wants to enjoy a timing effect (operation effect) at short intervals can select a song B. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and various players can execute the timing effect (operation effect) eagerly. Can do.

  Furthermore, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed at a short interval, the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e can be digested (outflowed) in a short period of time, so that the timing effect (at a long interval) It is possible to make it easier to store a new sphere in the storage channel 700e than when the operation effect is executed (that is, when the new sphere collides with a sphere stored in the storage channel 700e, It is possible to suppress a situation in which the flow does not flow into the storage channel 700e). Thereby, it is possible to increase the chance of entering a ball into the specific general entrance 630 by the timing effect (operation effect).

  In the present embodiment, among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b set during the timing effect (operation effect), the timing at which the player can enter the specific general entrance 630. The upper limit of the number of times of matching is 5 times, but a number of times (for example, 8 times) or more may be set. With this configuration, in addition to the spheres (up to five balls) stored in the storage channel 700e when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, a new storage is performed during the timing effect (operation effect). The second frame button (release button) 22b can be operated at a timing at which a sphere that has flowed into the flow path 700e can enter the specific general entrance 630. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to actively play the game so that more balls flow into the storage channel 700e.

  In the present embodiment, the interval between places where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) varies depending on the music, and the player selects the music so that the display pointer that is executed in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed. Although a configuration for narrowing or widening the display interval is used, as another configuration, a selection means for selecting a display interval of the display pointer 719 executed in a timing effect (operation effect) for the player, Further, setting means for setting the display location of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection means may be provided, or the same music piece can be selected by changing the playback speed of the music piece. It is also possible to provide a setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719. Even when such a configuration is used, it becomes possible to execute a timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and for various players, Timing effects (operation effects) can be executed.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of music pieces (music information) having different locations (intervals) where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are stored, but the display pointers set for the respective music pieces (music information). The displayable portion 719 may be configured to be associated with the movable valve closing timing of each scenario type of the movable valve 750. As a result, the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed (that is, the scenario type to be executed) is determined, the scenario type is specified based on the determination result, and the specified scenario is determined. By executing the music corresponding to the type as the timing effect (operation effect), the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 and the location where the music display pointer 719 can be displayed are easily matched. be able to. In this case, the display location of the display pointer 719 displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) can be set more easily by setting the timing at which the scenario type of the movable valve 750 is switched as the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect). can do.

  Next, the content of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of a difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Note that, among the elements displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in FIG. 11A described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 17, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, “ROUND1” is displayed on the round display unit 714 and a notification display for notifying that the difficulty level selection effect is being executed in the center of the screen. Then, the guidance display for guiding the method of selecting the difficulty level is executed. In this guidance display, a button display 721 indicating that selection is performed using the first frame button (effect button) 22a is displayed.

  At the bottom of the screen, an arrow 722 indicating the difficulty level that is currently selected is moved and displayed at a position indicating a low difficulty level and a high difficulty level every 2 seconds, and the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 have a corresponding difficulty level. A demo pointer 723 indicating the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed when the degree is selected is scrolled and displayed.

  Here, the demo pointers 723a to 723d when the high difficulty level displayed in the sub display area Ds5 is selected with respect to the demo pointer 723 when the low difficulty level displayed in the sub display area Ds4 is selected. A display mode that is difficult for a person to operate at a specific timing is set. Specifically, the demonstration pointer 723a displays an inhibition display indicated by an asterisk around the display pointer 719, the demo pointer 723b displays the display pointer 719 reduced, and the demo pointer 723c displays the display pointer. A non-target display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the center position of 719 is displayed, and the demonstration pointer 723d is displayed at a position where an inhibition display for making it difficult to visually recognize the display pointer 719 overlaps the display pointer 719.

  In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill, and different privileges are given to the various players according to the difficulty level. Thus, the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed eagerly. In addition, the number of times (success times) that the player has operated the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at an appropriate timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is accumulated, and the success number is increased. Based on this, the display mode of the display pointer 719 executed when the difficulty level is high may be changed to the display pointer 719 executed when the difficulty level is low. In addition, when a timing effect (operation effect) with a low level of difficulty is being executed, a display pointer 719 that matches the entry timing at which a ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 according to the number of successes. You may comprise so that the frequency that is displayed may be raised. As a result, the player can participate in the game more eagerly.

  In addition, if the cumulative number of successful operations of the operating means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at the appropriate timing in the timing effect (operation effect) exceeds a predetermined number, It may be possible to select a timing effect (operation effect) with a higher degree of difficulty and a greater difficulty obtained. As a result, it is possible to provide a selectable effect (super-difficulty effect) for a player only when a predetermined effect condition (the number of successes is a predetermined number) is satisfied. Can be more motivated to play games.

  In addition, in this embodiment, based on the operation content (success count) to the player executed in the timing effect (operation effect), the effect aspect of the timing effect (operation effect) is different, For example, an operation history of the player operating the first frame button 22a in an operation effect (for example, a mini game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change) executed other than the timing effect (operation effect) You may comprise so that the production | presentation aspect of a timing production (operation production) may differ based on (the number of operations, the operation content, and the operation result). Thereby, a game can be actively performed with respect to various operation effects performed with the pachinko machine 10, and it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early. Moreover, it is not restricted to the operation result with respect to the operation means (the 1st frame button 22a, the 2nd frame button 22b) by a player, For example, the time-measurement period time-measured by the time-measurement means (RTC), or a player performs a game. You may comprise so that the effect aspect of a timing effect (operation effect) may be switched based on the game period.

  Next, referring to FIG. 18, the content of the transmission effect that changes the cover member 710 provided in the panel unit 700 (see FIG. 2) from a shielded state in which the inside is difficult to see to a transparent state in which the inside is visible. explain. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram showing a shielding state, and FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram showing a transmission state. The same elements as those in FIG. 4 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the cover member 710 is attached so as to cover the entire area on the downstream side (downstream side of the first storage valve 770a) of the panel surface unit 700, except for the storage channel 700e side. It is attached so that the inside of the member 710 cannot be looked into. Then, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage flow path 700e side, the movable valve 750 is provided below the extending direction of the storage flow path 700e, so that the movable state of the movable valve 750 is visually recognized. It is configured not to be able to. Furthermore, since the first storage valve 770a is located at the protruding position, it is more difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage channel 700e side. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that the cover member 710 grasps | ascertains the movable condition of the movable valve 750 in the shielding state where the inside is difficult to visually recognize.

  In the cover member 710 configured in this manner, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down), and FIG. ), A half mirror is used so as to switch to a transmissive state in which the inside is visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the flow situation of the sphere flowing down near the movable valve 750.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 710 serving as a shielding unit is switched to a transmission state by irradiating light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. For example, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light applied to the cover member 710 from the light emitting means (LED) that is constantly lit is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which only the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside can be visually recognized, and a process for irregularly reflecting the irradiated light on the surface (for example, , Embossing). Thus, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 due to the light emitted from the decoration lamp 227a, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, the decoration In the state where the lamp 227a is not lit), the inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible. Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the store clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710.

  When such a configuration is used, a configuration is provided in which a shielding wall that shields the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a from being applied to the cover member 710 is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. It is good to provide. Thereby, even while the game is being performed, the player can visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710. Similarly to the first embodiment, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light is provided, and the light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that the inside of the cover member 710 May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which it is visible (a state in which light is not irradiated).

  Further, a decorative movable member is provided on the cover member 710 whose inside can be visually confirmed, and the operation of the movable member is controlled so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is movable valve 750). And a state in which the inside of the cover member 710 is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which the decorative movable member is movable at the overlapping position so as to cover the movable valve 750) may be switched. .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18A, the cover member 710 is configured to cover the entire downstream side of the panel unit 700, so that the movable valve 750 can be used when the cover member 710 is in a shielded state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and may be configured to have an effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 in a normal gaming posture. That's fine. For example, the cover member 710 may be configured to have a size that covers only the movable valve 750. Thereby, the structure which makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 can be constructed at low cost.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any prize opening is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 7, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 19). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 7 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 7, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 24, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set initial values for the first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type counter C3 used for selecting the stop-type, the variation-type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern, and the first per-random-number counter C1. A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the counter values for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning for the first entrance 64 and the winning for the second entrance 640. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage 203b is provided. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of 4 reserved balls, and a total of up to 8 reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if a ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, each counter value is displayed as a special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first holding ball storage area 203a and a game ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to an execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are performed for this purpose. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. Various settings and control processes are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, or during the period when the special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the first entrance 64. Alternatively, when winning at the second entrance 640, if the number of reserves for the winning entrance (starting entrance) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. And stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning entrance. In addition, when the number of reserves for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and 5 winning balls (in this embodiment) Only the prize ball is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is not limited to this, and is less than 4 (for example, 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. A random value that is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the random number value that is a jackpot defined in 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is “0” in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of “1 to 4”. If it is in the range of “1 to 4”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “0” is the first random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, since the total number of random numbers that is 300 is the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability that the special symbol is a jackpot is “1/300”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first per-random number counter C1, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random numbers “1-4” are the first per-random number table as described above. 202a. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 4 among the total number of random number values of 300, the probability that a special symbol jackpot will be “1/75”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20B). The Rukoto. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this embodiment, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, it is different from the symbol that has reached reach as the final stop symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected: “reach out” (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and “complete out” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in the probable state of special symbols, since a big hit is likely to occur, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide as 0 to 89 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. The table is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected, and “reach out” is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that “reach out” is difficult to select. Also, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. The table for the low probability is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out”, and the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “out of reach” is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21 and 22) storing a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the main control device 110's. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 21B and 22). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set. Is set. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the ball has passed through the right or left normal starting port (through gate) 67. Is detected and stored in the ordinary drawing execution area of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 20) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the second random number counter C4 is set to the first random number counter C4. When the value matches the random number value specified in the random number table 202c per two, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit. For example, in the second random number table 202c, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are five random values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-9”. ing. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is five. Therefore, the probability that the normal symbol is hit at the low probability of the normal symbol is “5. / 240 ".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”. . As described above, in this embodiment, since the random number values that are hit by the normal symbol are greatly different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability is greatly different. Also, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol is hit are different between the low probability and the high probability of the normal symbol. . For this reason, since the ease of entering the second entrance 640 differs greatly between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, It is possible to cause the player to play a game aiming at the first entrance 64.

  When the sphere passes through the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67 in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × twice”. On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67 in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the second symbol display device 83 executes the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for one second, and the acquired second per random number If the value of the counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). In addition to the display, the second entrance 640 is opened for “one second × twice”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the gameability is not impaired.

  The normal variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol variation pattern is selected based on the value of the general variation variation counter CS2. Specifically, a variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds is selected in the range of the normal variation type counter CS2 in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range).

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 42), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first per random number table 202a and the second per random number table 202c described above, a first per type selection table 202b, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, At least a movable valve operation scenario table 202f is provided.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is associated with “big hit A” in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”. It is prescribed. This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that are “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This “big hit A” is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, and after the big hit, the short time state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

  In addition, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 89”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. This “big hit B” is a big hit with 8 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 40 counter values that become “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 40% (40/100). This “big jackpot B” is set to 8 rounds, which is a smaller number of rounds than “big jackpot A”, but since a probabilistic state is given after the big jackpot ends, It is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous than “Big Jack A”, but the probabilistic state will continue until the next jackpot is won, so the player gains from when one jackpot starts until the game state returns to the normal state It is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "Big Jack A" in terms of possible rolls (expected rolls).

  In addition, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. This “big hit C” is a big hit with 16 rounds, as with “big hit A”. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “big hit C” has a larger number of rounds than the “big hit B”, and a promiscuous state is given after the big hit ends. Therefore, the jackpot type is more advantageous than “jackpot A” and “jackpot B”.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit A” in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 49”. Is in the range of “50 to 59” in association with “big hit B”, and in the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60 to 99”, “big hit C” is associated. It is prescribed. In other words, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same ratio (the ratio of 1: 1) of the benefits (ordinary short time state or probability variation state) given after the jackpot ends, but the number of rounds is 16 The ratio of the big jackpot for the round is specified so that the number of the second special symbol is larger.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the player who wins the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the player who wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. "Is easily selected. Therefore, once the consecutive home mode (special symbol probable state and normal symbol time-short state) is set, the right-handed player enters the second entrance 640 to draw the second special symbol. Are likely to be executed, and the jackpot is likely to be repeated. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the consecutive resort mode. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d defines a random value for determining a variation pattern (variation time) for variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the normal mode, a probability variation state, and a normal symbol time-short state (hereinafter, referred to as the following). Changes in special symbols after the jackpot of “big hit A”, which is a jackpot type to which 100 quick hours are given after the jackpot is completed, and the table 202d2 for probability variation / shortening for determining the fluctuation pattern in the “short running status”) At least a chance table 202d3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the 90th to 110th times is included.

  First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 21B, the normal table 202d1 includes a random number value (variation type counter value) for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type. CS1 counter value) is defined.

  In the present embodiment, it is defined that a common variation pattern (variation time) is selected regardless of the type of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). When the deviation is determined, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern of short deviation (5 seconds) in the range of “0 to 98” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and is long in the range of “99 to 198” (10 Second) variation pattern. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is missed and the leaching reach is determined as the stop type, various values of the normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 159” as the value of the variation type counter CS1. Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with the range of “160 to 198”. In addition, when the special symbol is a big win, lots of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0-50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the super reach is within the range of “51-179”. Various types (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and special reach types (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “180 to 198”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22A, details of the probability variation / shortening time table 202d2 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. The probability variation / time reduction table 202d2 is a table used to determine a variation pattern in the probability variation state and the time reduction state as described above.

  In the probability variation / short time table 202d2, the same variation pattern (variation time) is determined when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same variation type counter CS1. It is configured to be. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery is missed and complete fall is determined as the stop type, a short deviation (5 seconds) is associated with the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of “0 to 190”. , “191 to 198” is associated with extra long (10 seconds). In this way, in the probability variation state and the short time state, when the special symbol lottery is lost, and when complete stop is determined as the stop type, the ratio of the shorter departure than the normal mode (normal state) is higher. . Thereby, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the probability variation state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode (normal state) and in the short time state.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery is lost and the reach type is determined to be out of reach, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is set to a range of “0 to 198” (that is, all ranges) and various types of normal reach (30 seconds). Are associated. Also, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, which is a type of losing, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198” (that is, the entire range), with various super reach (60 seconds). ) Are associated.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is a big win, lots of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0-50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the super reach is within the range of “51-179”. Various types (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and special reach types (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “180 to 198”.

  Thus, unlike the normal mode (normal state), the variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected as the variation pattern to be selected in the probability variation state and the time shortening state in which the probability variation / time reduction table 202d2 is set. Furthermore, the lottery of the second special symbol that is more likely to win a jackpot (for example, jackpot C) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol is configured to be easily executed. Thereby, the lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be efficiently performed by striking a ball aiming at the 2nd entrance 640 by right-handing. In other words, an advantageous state is obtained in which a probable variation state is easily provided when a big hit is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that it will be a big hit.

  Next, the details of the chance table 202d3 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the chance table 202d3 is a period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (90 to 110 times after the end of the jackpot) after the end of the jackpot that is executed when the jackpot type is “big hit A”. It is a table in which the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is prescribed | regulated. In other words, in the “big hit A” to which a short-time state (period until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times) is given after the jackpot ends, from the final stage of the short-time state (90 to 100 times after the jackpot ends) and from the short-time state to the normal state It is a table used in the early stage (101 to 110 times after the end of the jackpot) after the game state transitions.

  Specifically, when complete outage is determined as the stop type, a fluctuation pattern of short out (5 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 98” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and “99 to The fluctuation pattern of the out-of-long (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “150”, and the fluctuation pattern of the out-of-chance (50 seconds) is associated with the range of “151 to 198”. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is missed and the leaching reach is determined as the stop type, various values of the normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 150” as the value of the variation type counter CS1. Various chance reach (50 seconds) are associated with the range of “151 to 198”. If the special symbol is a big win, lots of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0-10” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the chance reach is within the range of “11-179”. Various types (50 seconds) are associated with each other, and special reach types (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “180 to 198”. That is, in the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when the big hit is won, the ratio at which the chance fluctuation is selected is set to be the highest. As a result, by executing the variation display based on the chance variation, the player can have the expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630.

  As described above, the chance table 202d3 is configured such that a special variation type (chance variation type) with a variation time of 50 seconds can be selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol and the selection result of the stop type. The detailed description will be given later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. When the chance variation type is selected and the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e, the second frame button (cancel The operation effect suggesting the operation timing of the button 22b is executed. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the operation timing suggested in this operation effect, the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e enters the specific general entrance 630. It becomes possible to do.

  With this configuration, a ball stored in the storage channel 700e (storage device) during a game state (probability change state or time-short state) that can provide a right-handed game advantageous to the player is normally The release operation can be efficiently performed in the state. In this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected using the chance table 202d3 even during the period in which the right-handed game is being executed (the end of the short-time game). As a result, it is possible to make it easier to make the ball enter the specific general entrance 630 even when the expectation of winning the big hit during the right-handed game is low and the number of time reductions is reduced. The player can be motivated to play until the end of the short-time state.

  Furthermore, when a special symbol lottery is won, the current lottery result is notified by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b as an operation effect. By configuring in this way, using the operation means (second frame button (release button) 22b) for releasing the storage state of the storage device, an effect of suggesting (notifying) the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. It is possible to provide a game that gives the player an unexpectedness.

  In this embodiment, the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to is set so as to extend from the end of the time-saving state to the beginning of the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 600) without winning a jackpot, a variation pattern is set using the chance table 202d3. Alternatively, the chance variation type is associated with the predetermined value of the variation type counter CS1 in each variation pattern selection table used according to the gaming state without providing the chance table 202d3 as in the present embodiment. It may be defined as follows.

  Next, detailed contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. The movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the movable valve 750 are stored for each scenario type, and information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is stored. The movable valve 750 is operated in the order of scenario settings set during the power-on process.

  Specifically, the operation scenario 1 to the operation scenario 5 are defined as the scenario type in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. The operation scenario 1 is set as “2 seconds for opening → 0.1 seconds for closing (1 set) × 15 times” as a scenario content, and is an operation scenario for 31.5 seconds. That is, the movable valve 750 is movable so that the period during which the flowing ball can be guided to the specific general entrance 630 (the period during which the movable valve 750 is closed) is 0.1 seconds in 2.1 seconds. It is a scenario to be operated. This “closing 0.1 second” is a period in which the ball is guided to the specific general entrance 630 when the ball reaches the movable valve 750 in a timely manner, and a variable operation for closing the movable valve 750 is performed. Even when the player visually recognizes and operates the second frame button (release button) 22b, it is set as a period of time that elapses before the ball reaches the movable valve 750. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of the player operating the second frame button (release button) 22b while visually recognizing the operation state of the movable valve 750.

  The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario of 30.6 seconds in which “open 5 seconds → close 0.1 seconds (1 set) × 6 times” is set as the scenario content. The operation scenario 2 is set to be longer for the movable valve 750 to be in an open state (opened) than the operation scenario 1 described above, and is an operation scenario that is more disadvantageous to the player than the operation scenario 1. In addition, in the operation scenario 1 and the operation scenario 2, since the period during which the movable valve 750 is closed (closed) is the same, even if the player grasps the period during which the movable valve 750 is closed, This makes it difficult to predict the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed.

  Operation scenario 3 is set as “4 seconds open → ((0.1 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open) × 3) (1 set) × 6 times” as the scenario content, and the operation for 29.4 seconds. It is a scenario. This operation scenario 3 is different from the above-described operation scenario 1 and operation scenario 2, and the period (0.1 seconds) during which the movable valve 750 is closed (closed) is short (0.9 seconds) multiple times (0.9 seconds). (3 times) is an operation scenario that is set, and is an operation scenario in which a ball is easily guided to the specific general entrance 630.

  The operation scenario 4 is set as “3 seconds for opening → 0.5 seconds for closing (1 set) × 9 times” as a scenario content, and is an operation scenario for 31.5 seconds. In this operation scenario 4, the period during which the movable valve 750 is kept closed (closed) is set longer (0.5 seconds) than the operation scenarios 1 to 3 described above. Accordingly, it is possible to set a wide operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b for guiding the ball to the specific general entrance 630.

  As described above, the operation content of the movable valve 750 determined in advance is divided and stored in an operation period that is advantageous to the player and an operation period that is disadvantageous, and is currently executed (or It is possible to easily determine whether or not the operation of the movable valve 750 (to be executed in the future) is advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. In this movable valve operation scenario table 202f, setting order information for operating the movable valve 750 is assigned to each scenario type defined in a predetermined order. In the MPU of the main controller 110, when the operation control of the movable valve 750 is executed, the information corresponding to the contents defined in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is read from the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and moved. The valve 750 is moved.

  In this movable valve operation scenario table 202f, when the operation based on the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order “END” is completed, the loop process is executed so that the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order “1” is executed. . In this embodiment, the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is stored in advance in the order of setting. However, other configurations may be used, for example, a plurality of predetermined scenario types. A means for determining any of the above as the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is provided, the setting order “1” is set for the scenario type determined at the operation start timing, and thereafter the setting order is given in ascending order. Also good. Thereby, when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started, it is possible to vary the operation scenario that is executed first, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the movable valve 750.

  In addition, a plurality of operation scenarios defined in a predetermined order in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f are configured to be read in a loop, and the operation scenario to be read first (that is, the setting order “1” is set) The operation scenario executed first when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started can be made different, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the movable valve 750. In addition, the variable operation of the movable valve 750 can be provided fairly when viewed over a long period of time. Further, it is possible to prevent the operation process of the movable valve 750 from becoming complicated.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 25, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, hour and middle counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, release flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, other memory area 203z At least.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter. Each value of C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holds). Among the vacant areas of the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning at the second entrance 640 is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  If the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. One is added (see S404 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 34).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 34, S405 in FIG. 36). reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of retained balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is affected by noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the variable display held at 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero. Each time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is reached. One is added (see S410 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 34). Similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a change display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 of FIG. 39: No). ).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a special symbol probability change state (the special symbol is being changed). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the probability state of the special symbol is low. In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game whose jackpot type is “Big Jack B” or “Big Jack C” (see S1113 in FIG. 43). In addition, the probability variation flag 203g is set to off when a special symbol lottery is won and the start of the jackpot is set (see S219 in FIG. 34). In the initialized state (that is, the state in which the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability change flag 203g is reset to OFF and a normal power interruption occurs. In such a case, the state immediately before the power interruption occurs is backed up.

  The short / medium time counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining short time period (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the short time state (short time state) of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203h is set to 100 at the end of the big hit game whose jackpot type is “big hit A” (see S1112 in FIG. 43). In other words, in this embodiment, when the probability variation state is not set after the big hit game, the time reduction state of 100 times is given.

  The operation scenario storage area 203i is an area for reading and storing an operation scenario from the movable valve operation scenario table 202f when operation control of the movable valve 750 (see S1009 in FIG. 46) is started. The operation control of the movable valve 750 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

  The operation counter 203j is a counter used when performing operation control of the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771). Each time the storage valve operation process (see S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed, 1 is added (S1302), and operation control based on the value of the counter is executed.

  The release flag 203k is a flag for determining that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If it is on, the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If it is OFF, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b is not operated. This release flag 203k is set to ON when it is determined in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 44) that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated (S1202 in FIG. 44: Yes). When the storage valve operation process (S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed by being set to ON and the storage valve operation process (S1206 in FIG. 45) is completed, the storage valve operation process is set to OFF (see S1309 in FIG. 45).

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set to ON in a winning process (see S1010 in FIG. 47) that is executed to determine whether or not a ball is winning normally at the specific general entrance 630 (see FIG. 47). 47 (see S1504 in FIG. 47), which is used to start counting of the remaining ball timer described later.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is counted in order to identify a normal range in a winning process (see S1010 in FIG. 47) executed to determine whether or not a ball has won normally in the specific general entrance 630. Timer. Even when the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (a value corresponding to 1 second), an error command is set when a ball does not enter the specific general entrance 630.

  The movable valve initial setting flag 203p is a flag that is turned on in order to start the operation control of the movable valve 750. In the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41), the operation setting of the movable valve is set. It is set to ON when performing (see S914 in FIG. 41).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric role. The solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an object, the storage valve solenoid 770b for driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, and the movable valve 750 are projected (allowed) or buried (restricted). A movable valve solenoid 751 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erase switch (FIG. 7, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and a storage valve of the storage device. The second frame button (release button) 22b that is operated when canceling the image is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and the second frame button (release button) 22b, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 7, 122) Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and turning off in a lamp display device 227 (decorative lamp 227a, transmission lamp 227b, and other lamps 227c, etc.), fluctuations It controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display effects (variable display). The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the first frame button (effect button) 22a, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the first frame button (production button) 22a, and when the player operates the first frame button (production button) 22a, the third symbol display device 81 is operated. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the stage displayed in step 1 or to change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 26A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a movable valve operation scenario 222b, a music information storage area 222c, and a ball entry timing setting table 222d.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110.

  The movable valve operation scenario 222b is provided for grasping the operation state of the movable valve 750 controlled by the main controller 110 on the sound lamp controller 113 side, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. This is an area where information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is stored.

  Here, the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b. As shown in FIG. 27A, the movable valve operation scenario 222b is associated with the same information as the movable valve operation scenario stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, with the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t described later. It has been. Furthermore, scenario groups are set for a plurality of continuous scenario types. Thereby, based on the movable valve state command output from the main control device 110 side, the voice lamp control device side can also grasp the operation status (current operation status and future operation status) of the movable valve. The scenario group set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types is used to determine whether or not the operation state of the movable valve is an operation state advantageous to the player.

  The music information storage area 222c is an area in which music information used for the operation effect is stored, and is referred to when the display position of the effect pointer is set for the music used for the operation effect.

  Here, the contents of the music information storage area 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the music information storage area 222c. As shown in FIG. 28, in the music information storage area 222c, the music data 222c1 and the sound range type data (sound range 1 data 222c2, sound range 2 data) set for each sound range type obtained by dividing the sound range of the music data 222c1 by a predetermined threshold value. 222c3) are stored.

  The music data 222c1 is information (musical scale, tempo, etc.) related to the music executed (reproduced) by the operation effect, and the sound range type data (sound range 1 data 222c2, sound range 2 data 222c3) based on this information is set. Has been.

  The sound range type data (sound range 1 data 222c2, sound range 2 data 222c3) is information set by dividing the music data 222c1 into a plurality of sound ranges (sound range 1 (high range) and range 2 (low range)). In this information, the position corresponding to the tempo of the music executed in the operation effect (the position where the musical note is written in the scale of the music data 222c1) is set as the effect pointer displayable area. As described above, when the display position of the effect pointer is changed with respect to the operation effect by setting the displayable area of the effect pointer used in the operation effect in advance for the music data, the operation pointer is executed with the operation effect. It is possible to display the effect pointer at a timing without a sense of incongruity corresponding to the music to be (reproduced).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, in the music executed (reproduced) by the operation effect, the number of notes to be recorded is different in the range 1 and the range 2, so the range 2 data is more than the range 1 data 222c2. A lot of effect pointer displayable areas are set in 222c3. In other words, the range in which the displayable area of the effect pointer can be set is wider in the range 1 data 222c2 than in the range 2 data. In this way, by making it possible to set an effect pointer displayable area for each sound range for music executed (reproduced) in operation effects, it is possible to execute different operation effects using the same music It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary for providing a variety of operation effects to the player.

  Furthermore, in the operation effect, when using a configuration in which the player can select an interval for operating the operation means (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b), a sound range corresponding to the operation interval selected by the player An operation effect desired by the player can be executed simply by executing the operation effect using the type data (sound range 1 data 222c2, sound range 2 data 222c3).

  In addition, when a plurality of range type data is created from one piece of music data in this way and an operation effect corresponding to the selected range type data among the range type data is executed, the selected range type data is included in the selected range type data. A corresponding sound may be output when the operation means is operated. Thereby, when performing the operation effect which changed the range classification with respect to one music, a player's operation and operation effect can have a sense of unity. The production effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of sound range type data (sound range 1 data 222c2, sound range 2 data 222c3) are stored in one piece of music data 222c1 in the music information storage area 222c. For example, for one piece of music data 222c1, type data may be set for each of a plurality of musical instruments used, or type data may be set for a plurality of different tempos.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a variation start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. Flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time reduction state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, ball passage flag 223n, and release operation flag 223p A release state flag 223q, an effect temporary storage area 223r, a movable valve state storage area 223s, a movable valve operation counter 223t, a movable valve initial flag 223u, a closing timing storage area 223v, and a timing effect setting flag 223w , Production execution flag 23x, a pressing period information storage area 223y, a difficulty level storage area 223aa, a difficulty level selection flag 223ab, a ball passage information storage area 223ac, a ball entry timing storage area 223ad, and another memory area 223z. ing.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 50) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are fluctuating effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times for each special symbol type the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the variable number of reserved balls based on the first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol (223). This corresponds to the number of reserved balls in the variable effect based on the lottery of special symbol 2).

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. The number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol The number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e when the variable display in FIG. The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2211 in FIG. 50). Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are updated in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display controller 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display controller 114. Send.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, the second special symbol. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of retained balls corresponding to the value of the retained ball number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, the value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be changed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command when a command set when the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110 increases or decreases is received. This counter is used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols managed on the main controller 110 side with the number of retained balls of ordinary symbols managed on the sound lamp controller 113 side. is there. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when displaying the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, about the detailed content in the case of displaying the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the case where the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the reserved ball number of the special symbol mentioned above Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  The variation start flag 223e is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 55). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2710 in FIG. 55). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by incrementing by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 49) is executed. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown). When determining the effect pattern with reference to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. Thereby, when setting one production | presentation pattern, since the same counter value is no longer used in multiple places, the bias of the production | presentation pattern set can be suppressed. In addition, you may comprise so that an effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing a different process with respect to the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the production patterns, one selection refers to the first digit of the acquired value, another selection refers to the tenth digit of the acquired value, and another selection refers to one of the acquired values. You may make it refer to the 1st place of the obtained value by multiplying the value which made the place of 3 times and the value which made the place of the tens place 5 times. By comprising in this way, the bias | inclination of the production pattern set can be suppressed, reducing the number of counters used when setting a production pattern.

  The round number accumulation counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds in the jackpot game, and when a round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( 53 (S2504 in FIG. 53), the counter value is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect process (S2513 in FIG. 53). In the sound lamp controller 113, a display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2611 and S2614 in FIG. 54).

  The probability variation state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a certain symbol certain variation state. If the probability variation state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is off, it indicates that the probability state of the special symbol is low. The probability variation state flag 223i is updated in accordance with the notification contents of the state command output from the main controller 110. In accordance with the state of the probability variation state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether to display a right-handed navigation image displayed in the probability variation state of the special symbol, or whether to display a right-handed warning image when a right-handed game is executed in the normal state. To determine.

  The time-short state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time-short state of a normal symbol. At this time, if the short state counter 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time short state, and if it is off, it indicates that the normal symbol is in a normal state (low probability state). At this time, the short state counter 223j is updated according to the notification contents of the state command output from the main controller 110. At this time, according to the state of the short state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current state is the short state of the normal symbol, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image displayed in the short time state of the normal symbol, or whether or not to display a right-handed warning image in the normal state.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining that a sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e, and is set based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2 provided in the storage channel 700e. Is made. If this storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that a sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e, and if it is off, it indicates that no sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e. This storage state flag 223k is set to ON (see S2853 in FIG. 57) when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57) that the storage detection sensor S2 detects a sphere. When it is determined that the sensor S2 does not detect a sphere, the sensor S2 is set to off (S2855 in FIG. 57). Then, in the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55), when the variation pattern of the chance pattern is acquired (S2704: Yes in FIG. 55), it is referred to (S2705 in FIG. 55). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2705: Yes in FIG. 55), an effect (see FIG. 13) for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed.

  The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 700e has reached the upper limit number (5 in this embodiment). Settings are made based on the detection result of the provided storage upper limit sensor S1. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of spheres are stored in the storage flow path 700e, and if it is off, the upper limit number of spheres are not stored in the storage flow path 700e. It shows that. This storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON when the storage upper limit sensor S1 determines that a sphere is detected in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57) (see S2858 in FIG. 57). When it is determined that the sensor S1 has not detected a sphere, the sensor S1 is set to off (S2862 in FIG. 57). Then, in the jackpot effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54), when a predetermined round (7 or 15 round in the present embodiment) is entered (S2605: yes in FIG. 54), it is referred to (S2606 in FIG. 54). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2606: Yes in FIG. 54), an effect (see FIG. 11) for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed.

  The sphere passing flag 223n is a flag for determining that the sphere has passed a predetermined area in the board unit 700 (an area where the first sphere passing sensor S3 is provided). If the sphere passing flag 223n is on, it indicates that the sphere has passed the predetermined area, and if it is off, the sphere has not passed the predetermined area (for example, a predetermined period after the sphere has passed the predetermined area (for example, 1 second) has elapsed). The ball passage flag 223n is set to ON when the first ball passage sensor S3 (see FIG. 3) detects the passage of the ball in the ball passage monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56) (S2804 in FIG. 56). Similarly, in the ball passage monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56), when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630 within a predetermined period after the ball passage flag 223n is set to ON (SS2806 in FIG. 56: Yes), when the second sphere passage sensor S4 detects a sphere (S2807 in FIG. 56: Yes), or when a predetermined period has elapsed (S2808: Yes in FIG. 56), it is set to OFF (FIG. 56). S2813).

  The release operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If the release operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated, and if it is off, the second frame button (release button) 22b has not been operated. Indicates. This release operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S2219 in FIG. 50) when the release operation command is received (see S2218 in FIG. 50) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 50). When a command indicating a closed (non-released) state is received (see S2404 in FIG. 52: Yes) in S2217 in FIG. 52 (see S2406 in FIG. 52).

  The release state flag 223q is a flag for determining whether or not the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) are in an open (release) state. If this release state flag 223q is on, it indicates that the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is in an open (release) state, and if it is off, the storage device (first storage device). 770, the second storage device 771) is in a closed (non-released) state. This release state flag 223q is a storage device related process (see S2217 in FIG. 52) that is executed when a storage device related command is received (S2216: Yes in FIG. 50) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 50). When an open state command (a storage state command corresponding to the release state) is received (S2401: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to ON (see S2402 in FIG. 52), and a closed state command (storage corresponding to the non-release state) When the status command is received (S2404: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to off (see S2405 in FIG. 52). When the release state flag 223q is set to ON, the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) is executed, and the spheres stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) flow down. The situation is monitored.

  The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect contents until the effect is executed. For example, the effect aspect of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is provided. The content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored for the period from the set timing (7th or 15th round) to the timing (8th or 16th round) when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the big hit. . This effect temporary storage area 223r is determined in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) that the effect set this time is a timing effect (operation effect) executed during a big hit (FIG. 62). S3210: Yes), the set effect mode is stored (see S3214 in FIG. 62), and the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the jackpot effect process (see S2504 in FIG. 54) (8 or 16 rounds) ) Is executed (S2609 in FIG. 54: Yes), it is read out (S2611 in FIG. 54).

  The movable valve state storage area 223s is an area in which information for grasping the operation state of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) is stored on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the value of a movable valve operation counter 223t described later. Correspondingly, the operation status of the movable valve 750 is updated as needed. In the movable valve state storage area 223s, when movable valve state information including initial information is received in the movable valve state command processing (see S2215 in FIG. 51) (S2302 in FIG. 51: Yes), the movable valve operation scenario 222b. (See S2303 in FIG. 51), and the operation state of the movable valve 750 is updated based on the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t. It is determined whether the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s matches the content of the movable valve state command every time a movable valve state command is received from the main controller 110 (S2309 in FIG. 51). . Further, based on the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area (see S2306 in FIG. 51).

  The movable valve operation counter 223t is a counter used for grasping the operation state of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the movable valve operation stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s. This is for updating scenario information. This movable valve operation counter 223t is “1” when the movable valve operation scenario is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (see S2303 in FIG. 51) in the movable valve state command processing (see S2215 in FIG. 51). Each time the value is set (S2304 in FIG. 51) and the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112 in FIG. 64) executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the counter value is changed. “1” is added (S3403 in FIG. 64). If the counter value has reached the upper limit, the counter value is set to “1” again (S3404 in FIG. 64). In this way, by updating the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t in the process (main process) executed periodically (1 ms), the operation state of the movable valve 750 is appropriately managed on the sound lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

  The movable valve initial flag 223u is a flag for determining a state immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and is a state in which a movable valve operation scenario is initially set in the movable valve state storage area 223s. It is used to determine whether or not. If this movable valve initial flag 223u is on, it indicates a state immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This movable valve initial flag 223u is set to ON in the startup process (see FIG. 48) of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S2013 in FIG. 48), and is referenced in the movable valve state command process (see FIG. 51) (see FIG. 51). 51 (S2301), the movable valve operation scenario is set to the movable valve state storage area 223s and then set to OFF (S2305 in FIG. 51). Further, when the movable valve initial command 223u is set to ON and the initial information is not included in the movable valve state command received from the main controller 110, an error command is set (FIG. 51). S2307).

  The closing timing storage area 223v is an area for storing the closing timing of the movable valve 750. Based on the information set in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed (that is, the sphere is The timing of entering the specific general entrance 630) is stored. This closing timing storage area 223v receives the movable valve state command including the initial information from the main controller 110 in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 in FIG. 51) (S2302 in FIG. 51: Yes), and the movable valve state. When the movable valve operation scenario is set in the storage area 223s, the closing timing of the movable valve is calculated based on the movable valve operation scenario, and the calculated closing timing is stored (S2306 in FIG. 51). The closing timing stored in the closing timing storage area 223v is referred to when setting the effect pointer in the timing effect (operation effect).

  The timing effect setting flag 223w is a flag for determining whether to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for executing an effect that causes the player to operate the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). If it is ON, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if OFF, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied. In the present embodiment, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), a specific variation pattern (chance variation type) is selected and a sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e, or A state in which a predetermined round (8R, 16R) in the jackpot game is set is set.

  The timing effect setting flag 223w indicates that the acquired variation pattern is a chance pattern (variation pattern indicating a chance variation type) in the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55) (S2704: Yes in FIG. 55), and the storage state When it is determined that the flag 223k is on (S2705: Yes in FIG. 55), the flag 223k is set to on. Also, in the hit-related process (S2221 in FIG. 53), an interval command indicating the end of 7 or 15 rounds is received (S2507: Yes in FIG. 53), and it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (FIG. 53). S2508: Yes) is set to ON.

  When the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON, a timing effect (operation effect) is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60) (see S3102 to S3105 in FIG. 60). If the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is to be executed during the special symbol change, after setting the display timing effect command in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62). (See S3211 in FIG. 62) is set to OFF (S3213 in FIG. 62), and the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is executed during the jackpot game, the jackpot effect process (see FIG. 54 (see S2504 in FIG. 54), the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2609: Yes in FIG. 54), and after setting the display effect round command (see S2611 in FIG. 54), it is turned off. It is set (S2613 in FIG. 54).

  The effect execution flag 223x is a flag for determining whether the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is ON, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. Indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. This effect execution flag 223x is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operation means (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) is an operation based on the timing effect (operation effect). This effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3212 in FIG. 62) after the display timing effect command is set (see S3211 in FIG. 62) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62). ). Further, in the jackpot effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54), a round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2609: Yes in FIG. 54), and the display effect round command is set (FIG. 54). S2611) is set to ON (S261612 in FIG. 54). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) ends, it is set to off.

  The pressing period information storage area 223y is an operating means (first frame button 22a or second frame) set to correspond to the display timing of a pointer (effect pointer, winning pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). This is an area for storing the operation timing of the button 22b). In this pressing period information storage area 223y, the successful pressing period is set in correspondence with the set display pointer (effect pointer, hit pointer) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) (FIG. 62). (See S3209). The success pressing period set here is the time when the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) are pressed in the frame button input monitoring / production process (see S2107 in FIG. 59). Is referred to (see S3005 and S3006 in FIG. 59).

  The difficulty level storage area 223aa is an area for storing difficulty level information of a timing effect (operation effect) selected by the player. In this difficulty level storage area 223aa, the difficulty level information selected in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 59) is stored (see S3012 in FIG. 59). The information stored in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is referred to when setting the effect mode of the corresponding timing effect (S3133 in FIG. 61 (a)), and cleared when the corresponding timing effect (operation effect) ends. The

  The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether an effect for selecting a difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed (whether it is a timing at which the difficulty level can be selected). Indicates that it is a timing at which the difficulty level can be selected, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not a timing at which the difficulty level can be selected. The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operation means (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) is an operation based on the effect of selecting the difficulty level. The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON when it is determined that the first round is started (S2602: Yes in FIG. 54) in the jackpot effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54), and the first round ends. When it is determined that it has been performed (S2602: No in FIG. 54), it is set to OFF.

  The ball passage information storage area 223ac is an area for storing information indicating a passage period until the ball stored in the storage channel 700e passes through the specific general entrance 630 or the outlet 700b of the board surface unit 700. It is. Based on the information indicating the passage period stored in the ball passage information storage area 223ac, the position where the pointer (effect pointer) is displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is corrected. The ball passage information storage area 223ac stores information indicating the passage period calculated in the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) (S2812 in FIG. 56), and the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63). (Refer to S3301 in FIG. 63). The ball passage information storage area 223ac is configured to be capable of storing a plurality (for example, 1000 times) of information indicating the passage period. Therefore, since it is possible to correct the timing effect (operation effect) using the passage periods calculated a plurality of times, for example, the effect content is corrected based on the occurrence of an unexpectedly moving sphere. Therefore, an appropriate timing effect (operation effect) can be set.

  In this embodiment, the ball passage information storage area 223ac is provided in the RAM 223. For example, the ball passage information storage area 223ac is provided on a recording medium capable of holding information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. May be.

  The entry timing storage area 223ad stores the entry timing set in the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63) based on the passage period calculated in the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56). It is an area to do. Based on the entrance timing stored in the entrance timing storage area 223ad, an effect mode (effect pointer) of the timing effect (operation effect) is set.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed after the end of the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 65) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 65).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is “special symbol jackpot”, “○” symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” symbol is displayed after stopping the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the entry to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 so as to be displayed at 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If a ball is detected at the first ball slot 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Further, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 11A) and the like are also stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on and that the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a that are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special gaming state (big hit state) is to be notified to the player.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 30). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 31 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (the address “0002H” in FIG. 31 is applicable).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S5005 in FIG. 65). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 76 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 67B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 67B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 67 (b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 73 to 75) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 76A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 76B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 67 (b) In step S5303), pointer update processing (see step S6205 in FIG. 73) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 32), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 32, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed (FIG. 67 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6207 in FIG. 73). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6713 in FIG. 77). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6714 in FIG. 77). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 78).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 67B) is executed (see S6802 in FIG. 78).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 47. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 300, 99, 239, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and a through associated with the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is executed. A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, respectively. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A, jackpot B or jackpot C is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot is B, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot is C, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the green LED is turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a specific winning opening opening scenario is set (S217), and then a jackpot start is set (S218). Note that the opening scenario specifically indicates setting of an opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in rounds 1 to 11 and 13 to 15, a specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won). This indicates that the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened with a pattern according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 16). When the process of S218 ends, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S219). Next, the hour / middle counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

  On the other hand, if the current lottery result is out of the process in S216 (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S222), and the value is not 1 or more (ie, 0 If it is determined (Yes) (S222: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S222: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S223). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S224). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S224: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hour / middle counter 203h is 0 (S224: Yes), the process proceeds to S221.

  In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this process ends.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 34) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the high probability time Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share a common determination value. However, depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected. A different random value may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the determination value which is a big win is set to the same number by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are big hits may be varied. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first per-random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “200” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits this match, the special symbol jackpot It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes) The display mode for jackpot time indicating the jackpot is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit (big hit) of the three types of special symbols is compared. A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) are determined as to which jackpot type.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

  As the variation pattern defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “missing chance”, “disappear” Various types of “normal reach”, “outgoing super reach”, and “outside chance reach” are defined. In addition, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared chance reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is out of reach or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 42). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 33), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When there is a start winning, various random number counters are acquired and a process for holding the value is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. Each process of S407 to S412 is different in that the process of holding the holding ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. Moreover, when each process of S407-S412 is complete | finished, a prefetch process is performed (S413) and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, referring to FIG. 37, the prefetching process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413). This prefetch process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 36).

  In this look-ahead process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and any of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is determined. If there is no new prize (S501: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the variation is a special symbol probability changing state. If it is determined (S502) and the probability of the special symbol is changed (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per-random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a special symbol probability changing state (S502: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first per-random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. Migrate to In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of the display showing the hit and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S608). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S608: Yes), the second acquired in the processing of S607. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 20C).

  In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S608: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 Based on the second random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 20C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S611: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S613: Yes), the electric combination associated with the second entrance 640 is obtained. The release period of the object 640a is set to 1 second, and the number of releases is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of releases is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

  In the process of S611, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

  In the process of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S617). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S617: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 1 second (S618), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S617: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this process is terminated. Thus, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 1 second” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S618 or the processing of S619 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S616, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device is ended. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S612 or S616.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device starts the variation display being executed. Determination is made (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is started. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S614 or the process of S615 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol is displayed. The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The first area is stored (S705), and the process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S910 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S910. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of S1017 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. Main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S912) of RAM 203 after sending out the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are set to be closed (S913). That is, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) is always in the closed state (that is, the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3) It is set so that it cannot pass through. Thereby, in the state which RAM203 was initialized, the storage apparatus (the 1st storage valve 770a and the 2nd storage valve 771a) can always be made into a fixed state, and the specific general entrance 630 It is possible to make the ball difficult to enter. Therefore, the gaming state after the initialization of the RAM 203 can be optimized, and the RAM 203 can be initialized to prevent the act of illegally storing the ball in the specific general entrance 630.

  When the process of S912 is completed, the operation of the movable valve 750 is set (S914). In the process of S914, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p for starting the operation control of the movable valve 750 is set to ON. When the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON, the operation control of the movable valve 750 is performed in the movable valve control process (see S1009 in FIG. 42) of the main process (see FIG. 42) of the main controller 110 described later. Be started. In this embodiment, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON in the process of S914 of the startup process. For example, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON every time the startup process is executed. It is also possible to configure so that the timing to be changed is different.

  With this configuration, the timing at which the operation control of the movable valve is started each time the start-up process is executed can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed time since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, when using a configuration in which the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON is used in this way, for example, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON at the same timing. It is good to do so.

  As a method for changing the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to be on, for example, a delay timer for delaying the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to be on is provided. Processing to execute the timer may be performed. The delay period set in the delay timer uses values of various counters provided in the main control device 110, information stored in a storage area updated as needed, or lottery of delay periods. What is necessary is just to provide the lottery means to determine. When the process of S914 ends, the process proceeds to S915.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S915. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S915, a command (status command) for notifying the gaming state when the power is restored is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S915). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state. A status command is generated in accordance with the value of the hour / medium counter 203h and the state of the probability variation flag 203g and is output to the sound lamp control device 113. By outputting this status command, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can match the recognition of the gaming state. Therefore, even though the special symbol is in a low probability state, a right-handed navigator (see FIG. 5A) is displayed, or conversely, even though the special symbol is in a probabilistic state, the player It is possible to prevent (suppress) the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) from being displayed when right-handed. That is, the gaming state can be matched with the effect to be executed.

  When the process of S915 ends, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S916). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S917), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the RAM 203 has not been initialized, the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, and thus the detailed description is omitted, but the storage device (first storage valve) 770a, second storage valve 771a) and movable valve 750 are subjected to operation control continued from the state before the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is temporarily turned off due to noise or the like, the game can be continuously executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, when the start-up process is executed, the following control different from the present embodiment is performed as the setting of the operation control for the storage device (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) and movable valve 750. May be executed. First, a start-up process is executed to determine whether or not the current process is in a state in which the RAM 203 is initialized. If it is determined that the RAM 203 has not been initialized, whether or not the power is normally turned off. Is determined. Thus, it is specified whether the state when the start-up process is executed is an initialization state, a normal power-on state, or an abnormal power-on state.

  In the case of an abnormal power-on state, since it is a temporary power interruption state (instantaneous power state) due to noise or the like, the operation continued from the state before the power is turned off using the data backed up in the RAM 203 Execute control processing. Next, in the normal power-on state, the same processing as that executed when the RAM 203 described above in the present embodiment is initialized is executed. Finally, in the initialized state, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) is closed (that is, the sphere can pass through the storage flow path 700e (see FIG. 3)). The movable valve 750 is set at a specific timing (for example, a delay period of 0 second) and at a specific position (for example, a position stored at the top) of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. The process may be executed so that the operation control is started from the beginning.

  As a result, in the case of an abnormal power-on state, the game can be continuously executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. In the case of a normal power-on state, the movable valve is The timing at which the operation control is started can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed time since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, in the initialization state, the movable valve 750 is controlled with a specific operation content, so that it can be easily set when it is desired to operate the movable valve 750 with the same content for a plurality of pachinko machines 10. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 33) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) or the start winning process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 43) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, for each round of the jackpot state, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed according to the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34). In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 35), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) is completed, The variation display being executed is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 35). Display (lights up).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) or the process of S619, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the second symbol display device 83 executes it. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S612 or S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) ( (Lights up).

  After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). Although this storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, a process for setting the opening and closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed.

  When the process of S1008 ends, a movable valve control process is executed (S1009). This movable valve control process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, but based on the set state of the movable valve initial setting flag 203p, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed or A process for controlling the release state is executed. Next, when the process of S1009 ends, a winning process is executed (S1010). This winning process (S1010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1012). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1012: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1014).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1011, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power supply is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 40 has been executed, the power-off process after S1015 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1017), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1011 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1010 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, various effects according to the jackpot are performed, and a specific winning opening 65a. Is a process for opening or closing.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) S218 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this processing is terminated.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1103 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1103: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the newly started round number is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) ) If the winning is above, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

  In the process of S1107, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is closed (S1108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special game state (16 rounds or all 8 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1110 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot A (S1111). In order to shift, 100 is set to the value of the hour / minute counter 203h (S1112), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1111 that the current jackpot is not jackpot A (that is, jackpot B or C) (S1111: No), after the jackpot B or C ends, a special symbol high probability state is entered. In order to make the transition, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1113), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a. As described above with reference to FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, a plurality of spheres (upper limit of 5) stored in the storage flow path 700e are 1 based on an operation on the second frame button (release button) 22b. The operations of the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 and the second storage valve 771a of the second storage device 771 are controlled so as to flow down one by one. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e flow down in accordance with the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b performed by the player. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, the first storage valve 770 a and the second storage valve 771 a are different from each other by driving one electrical drive source (storage valve solenoid 770 b). It is configured to be opened (released) and closed (not released) at timing (predetermined timing). By comprising in this way, compared with the case where an electric drive source is provided with respect to each storage valve, respectively, a number of parts can be reduced, and cost reduction and space saving of an apparatus can be achieved.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the release flag 203s is not on (that is, is off) (S1201: No), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are set in a state in which a sphere can be stored). It is determined whether or not the player is pressing (operating) the button 22b (S1202). That is, it is determined whether or not a press detection signal is detected.

  In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1202: No), the first In order to keep the storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a in the closed state, the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S1202: Yes), a release button operation command is set (S1203). ). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set, the release flag 203k is set to ON (S1204), and the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are opened. In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 that the state has been reached, a storage state command corresponding to the open state (release state) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set (S1205), This process ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back surface type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), it is set to a mode in which the characters “gate open” are displayed for the small area Ds2. Thereby, it can be made to recognize easily that the 1st storage valve 770a and the 2nd storage valve 771a are an open state with respect to a player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is on (S1201: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed. (S1206). The details of the storage valve operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S1206 is completed, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203k is off (S1207). If it is determined that the release flag 203k is not off (ie, is on) (S1207: No), this processing ends To do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1207 that the release flag 203k is on (S1207: Yes), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 770). This means that the storage device 771 is set in a state where the sphere can be stored), so that the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are in the closed state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set (S1208), and this process is terminated.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back surface type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the small region Ds2 is set in such a manner that the characters “open the gate when the button is pressed!” Are displayed. Thereby, it can be easily recognized that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set to the open state by pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b to the player.

  By executing this storage control process, it is possible to set the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a to be opened or closed according to the operation status of the second frame button (release button) 22b. Thus, by storing the ball on top of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a at an arbitrary timing of the player, the state where the ball enters the outlet, the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 2 It is possible to switch between a state in which a sphere that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 771 flows down toward the specific general entrance 630.

  Here, a storage valve operation process (S1206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the storage valve operation processing (S1206). This storage valve operation process (S1206) is executed in the storage control process (see FIG. 44), and is a process for setting the operations of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a.

  In the storage valve operation process, first, the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to ON in the positive direction (S1301), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1302). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303). In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to OFF (S1304), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1303 that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 250 (S1303: No), it is then determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305). In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to ON in the negative direction (S1306), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 375 (S1305: No), it is then determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 (S1307). In the processing of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 (S1307: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to OFF (S1306). Then, the release flag 203k is set to OFF (S1309), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1310), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 500 (S1307: No), this process is terminated.

  Next, the movable valve control process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this movable valve control process (S1009). This movable valve control process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the movable valve 750.

  In the movable valve control process, first, it is determined whether or not the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is on (S1201). If it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is on (S1201: Yes), the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is movable. Based on the valve operation scenario table 202f, the operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i (S1402). When the process of S1403 ends, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to OFF (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is not on (that is, is off) (S1201: No), the processes of S1402 and S1403 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the processing of S1404, the operation information is acquired from the operation scenario storage area 203i (S1404), and it is determined based on the acquired operation information whether it is the start timing of a new scenario type (S1405). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new scenario type (S1405: Yes), a movable valve state command indicating the start of a new scenario type is set (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1407. This movable valve state command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 42). The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the movable valve state command to the display control device 114 as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1405 that it is not the start timing of a new scenario type (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1407. In the processing of S1407, it is determined whether it is the closing timing of the movable valve 750 based on the operation information acquired in the processing of S1404 (S1407). In the process of S1407, when it is determined that it is the closing timing of the movable valve 750 (S1407: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to ON (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the movable valve 750 (S1407: No), the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the movable valve 750 based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404 (S1409). In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1409 that it is not the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: No), the process proceeds to S1411. In the process of S1411, the operation counter 203j is incremented by 1, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47, the winning process (S1010) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1010). This winning process (S1010) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a.

  In the winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the release flag 203k is on (S1502). If it is determined that the release flag 203k is on (S1502: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the passing of the game ball (S1503). If it is determined that the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the passing of the game ball (S1503: Yes), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1502 that the release flag 203k is not on (that is, is off) (S1502: No), and in the process of S1503, the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the game ball. If it is determined that it has not been performed (S1503: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to S1505.

  If it is determined in S1501 that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501: Yes), and if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set on in S1504, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is a release period (open period), and is updated by adding 1 to the remaining ball timer 203n that counts the release period (open period) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a (S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (that is, whether 1 second has elapsed since the release of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a has been set) (S1506). ), When it is determined that it is not the upper limit (one second has not elapsed) (S1506: No), it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific general entrance 630 (S1507) If it is determined that no game ball has entered the general entrance 630 (S1507: No), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S1507, when it is determined that a game ball has entered the specific general entrance 630 (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1508. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1506 that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit (S1506: Yes), an error command is set (S1510), and the process proceeds to S1508. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of a winning number mismatch error) is set, and an error signal output is set to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegally winning a game ball at the specific general entrance 630.

  In the processing of S1508, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1508), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1509). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 63, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 48, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S2120 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 49). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 49, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 49), it executes a power-off process in S2120. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2120 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S2120 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to SS2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2120, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S2120, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2120 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 49). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2120 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2120 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability variation state flag 223i is updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main controller 110 (S2011), interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. By updating the probability variation state flag 223i based on the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2112. Whether or not 1 msec has passed in the process of S2101 is mainly related to the display (effect) in S2102 to S2112, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec) This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2113, the fluctuation display setting process of S2114, the ball passage monitoring process of S2115, and the storage state monitoring process of S2116 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay. Further, by executing the process of S2115 with a short cycle, the setting regarding the passage counter can be performed without delay based on the first sphere passage sensor S3 and the second sphere passage sensor S4, and the process of S2116 is performed with a short cycle. By being executed, the setting relating to the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m can be performed without delay based on the storage state.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2116 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol number-of-balls counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the first frame button 22a operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and the input of the first frame button 22a is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case. In this process, when an operation by the player on the first frame button 22a is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the first frame button 22a is set to the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S2110 ends, a timing effect setting process is performed (S2111). Details of this timing effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the process of S2111 is completed, a movable valve operation counter update process is executed (S2112). The movable valve operation counter update process is a process for updating the movable valve operation counter based on the movable valve operation scenario. Details of the movable valve operation counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the movable valve operation counter update process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2113). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2115. In the process of S2115, a ball passage monitoring process is executed (S2115). In the ball passing monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the ball passage monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2116. In the process of S2116, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2116). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the storage state monitoring process is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2117). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2117 (S2117: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2119), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2120). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2121), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S2117 (S2117: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2118), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2118: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2118: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2113). This command determination processing (S2113) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 50, S2113), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is obtained. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main controller 110 is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each of the symbols.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol) as a special symbol variation pattern type. When stored in the format and in the later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 55), the display control device 114 is notified of the start of the variation display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the special symbol. This is used in the case of setting a special symbol display variation pattern command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) has been received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to ON. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special type The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON. Next, a stop type (completely out of reach, out of reach, small hit, or big hit A to C) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and this process ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Then, it is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  If it is determined in step S2204 that a stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), a display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this process ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a reserve ball number command is received from the main controller 110 (S2209). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding value provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is matched with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), so the starting win is received. Each time there is a value, the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special symbol 1 reservation of the main control device 110 by the process of S2210. It can be adjusted to the values of the ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 becomes the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Or, even if it deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is received. Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2209 that no pending ball number command has been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2212). If it is determined in the process of S2212 that a prize information command has been received (S2212: Yes), a prize information command reception process is executed (S2213). In this winning information command reception process (S2213), various flags to be referred to and various counters to be set for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are set. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol on hold, the change of the special symbol on hold is started before the change of the special symbol on hold is started (that is, the special symbol being executed before the change of the target special symbol). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol to which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is sent to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be made, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that a winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether a movable valve state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2214). When it is determined that the movable valve state command has been received (S2214: Yes), the movable valve state command process is executed (S2215), and this process ends.

  Here, the movable valve state command process (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the movable valve state command processing (S2215). This movable valve state command process (S2215) is a process executed in order to grasp the operation state (open / closed state) of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In the present embodiment, a movable valve operation scenario 222b including the same information as the operation information (operation scenario) for the main controller 110 to operate the movable valve 750 is stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp controller 113. By synchronizing the progress of the operation information with the operation control of the main control device 110, it is possible to grasp the future operation status of the movable valve 750 on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Thereby, the production based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve can be set and executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side. By executing an effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve, it is possible to suggest the timing at which the player operates (presses) the second frame button 22b.

  When the movable valve state command process (S2215) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the movable valve initial flag 223u is on (S2301). If it is determined that the movable valve initial flag 223u is on (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether initial information is included in the currently received movable valve state command (S2302). That is, the movable valve state command received in the state where the movable valve initial flag 223u that is set to ON when the power is turned on is set to ON is executed in the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether the command is a movable valve state command including initial information indicating that the operation control of the movable valve 750 set in the operation setting of the movable valve (see S914 in FIG. 41) is started. In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the first time information is included in the currently received movable valve state command (S2302: Yes), the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2303). ), The value of the movable valve operation counter 223t is set to 1 (S2304), and the movable valve initial flag 223u is set to OFF (S2305).

  Then, based on the movable valve operation scenario set in the movable valve state storage area 223s and the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t, the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed is acquired. The acquired movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area 223v (S2306), and this process ends. That is, in this embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 has the same information as the information of the operation scenario used when the main control device 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750. When starting the operation control of 750, information (initial information) indicating the start is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first information, the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 The operation state of the movable valve 750 is grasped using the same information as the information. Note that the initial information set in the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41) includes the start timing of the movable valve 750 and the type of operation scenario used. As other information, for example, when using a configuration in which the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is made different (delayed), it is actually movable after the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41) is executed. Period information indicating a period until the operation of the valve 750 is started (that is, a delay period) may be included in the initial information.

  When starting the operation of the movable valve 750 and using a configuration in which the start location of the operation scenario is different, information indicating the start location set this time may be included in the initial information. Furthermore, as initial information, period scenario information indicating operation scenario information for a predetermined period after the operation of the movable valve 750 is started may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can set the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b in the movable valve state storage area 223s based on the scenario information for a predetermined period when the first time information is received. It is possible to easily synchronize with the operation state of the movable valve 750.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2302 that the information received this time does not include the initial information (S2302: No), the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 41) and the startup of the sound lamp control device 113 are performed. It is determined that the timing at which the process (see FIG. 48) is executed is different, an error command is set (S2307), and this process ends. If an error command is set here, a notification that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is to be turned on again is given to the third symbol display device 81 based on the set error command. Then, when the power is turned on again, the start-up process of the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is executed again, and the normal state can be restored. If an error command is set even if the power is turned on multiple times, it is determined that the rising timing of the main control device 110 and the rising timing of the sound lamp control device 113 are not normal timings. You may comprise so that the setting content of an error command may be changed.

  In the process of S2301, when it is determined that the movable valve initial flag 223u is not on (is off) (S2301: No), the current operation status of the movable valve 750 that is updated as needed by the sound lamp control device 113. Is read from the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2308), and compared with the currently received movable valve state command, it is determined whether the contents match (S2309). Here, if it is determined that the contents match (S2309: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contents do not match (S2309: No), an error command indicating that the contents do not match is set (S2307), and this process ends.

  Here, if the information indicating the operation status of the movable valve does not match when the movable valve status command received from the main control device 110 and the operation status of the movable valve status storage area 223s of the sound lamp control device 113 do not match. A storage unit capable of storing the determined number of times may be provided, and an error command may be set when the number of times stored in the storage unit is stored a predetermined number of times, specifically, a predetermined number of times continuously stored. As a result, it is possible to suppress the determination of an error as a result of a determination result in which the contents do not match due to suddenly generated noise.

  In the present embodiment, the operation scenario used when the main controller 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750 is configured by combining a plurality of scenario types for a predetermined period (about 30 seconds). Is configured to transmit the movable valve state command at the timing when the mode is switched to a new scenario type. As a result, the total number of commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 can be reduced. In addition to this, when the sound lamp control device 113 enters a state where there is a possibility of performing an effect based on the operation state of the movable valve 750, that is, when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern. The movable valve state command is output when the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when the chance variation type is actually selected from the chance table 202d3, or when the big hit is started. Thus, the total number of commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and an effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. In the process of S2214, when it is determined that the movable valve state command has not been received (S2214: No), it is determined whether a storage device related command has been received (S2216). If it is determined in S2216 that a storage device related command has been received (S2216: Yes), a storage device related process is executed (S2217), and this process ends.

  Here, the storage apparatus related processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the storage device related processing (S2217). This storage device related process (S2217) is an operation of the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) that is executed based on the player operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. This is a process for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the contents.

  When the storage device related process (S2217) is executed, first, the storage device related command received this time is an open (release) state of the storage device (a state where a sphere can flow down the storage flow path 700e (see FIG. 3)). It is determined whether the command indicates (S2401). If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the command indicates an open state (S2401: Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to ON (S2402), a display release command is set (S2403), and this process is performed. finish. The display release command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114, and a dedicated effect is executed when the storage device is released. As this special effect, for example, a suggestion mode that suggests a privilege (15 prize balls) given to the player when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the ball enters the specific general entrance 630, the suggestion mode is changed to the fixed mode, and when the ball does not enter the specific general entrance 630, the suggestion mode is changed. An effect that disappears is executed.

  In the process of S2401, when it is determined that the storage device related command received this time is not a command indicating an open state (S2401: No), it is determined whether the storage device related command received this time is a command indicating a closed state. If it is a command indicating a closed state (S2404; Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to off (S2405), the release operation flag 223p is set to off (S2406), and display is not released. A command is set (S2407), and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the first state is the non-release state in which the sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e and the release state in which the sphere can flow down. The storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are varied by controlling the operation (see FIG. 9). Since this operation control is a control for changing the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a in a preset order, after receiving a command indicating a release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, The period until the command indicating the non-released (closed) state in which the sphere is stored is constant (1 second). Therefore, in the storage apparatus related process (S2217), a measuring unit that measures a period after receiving a command indicating an open (released) state is provided, and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed by the measuring unit. However, an error command may be set when a command indicating a closed (non-released) state is not received. Thereby, it can be immediately determined that the situation grasp for the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) for which the main control device 110 is controlling the operation is not normal.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that a storage device related command has not been received (S2216: No), it is then determined whether a release operation command has been received (S2218). If it is determined in step S2218 that a release operation command has been received (S2218: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and the process ends. This release operation command is a command output when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (S2220).

  In the process of S2220, when it is determined that a hit related command has been received (S2220: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S2221), and this process ends. The detailed contents of the hit-related processing (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2220 that a hit-related command has not been received (S2220: No), processing according to another command is executed (S2222), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, a command for entering a ball is set based on whether a ball has entered each entrance provided in the game board 13. Is received, the process of accumulating the number of entered balls is executed for each type of entrance into which the ball entered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the hit-related process (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S2221). This hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 560) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This process is executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110.

  When the hit-related process (S2221) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then a display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2501 that an opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2503). If it is determined in the process of S2503 that a round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the round number cumulative counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the big hit / medium effect process is executed ( S2505), the process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot effect processing (S2505) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect processing (S2505). In this jackpot effect processing (S2505), as an effect executed during the jackpot, in addition to the jackpot game effect for congratulating the jackpot, an operation effect that causes the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b ( A production mode of a timing production) and a difficulty level selection production that causes the player to select the difficulty level of the operation production (timing production) is set, and each production is executed.

  When the jackpot effect processing (S2505) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is on. If it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is not ON (OFF) (S2601: No), it is then determined whether the currently received round number command is the round number command indicating the first round of jackpot (S2602). If it is determined in the process of S2602 that the command is the round number command indicating the first round (S2602: Yes), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S2603), and this process ends. Here, by setting the difficulty level selection flag 223ab to ON, based on the operation signal of the frame buttons (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) operated while the first round of the jackpot is being executed. The process of selecting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in a frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107 in FIG. 59) described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the command is not the round number command indicating the first round (S2602: No), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to off (S2604), and then the number of rounds received this time It is determined whether the command is the seventh or fifteenth jackpot (S2605). In the process of S2605, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the seventh or fifteenth round (S2605: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2606), and the storage upper limit flag 223m. Is determined to be on (S2606: Yes), the condition for enabling execution of the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, so the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2607), and the display notice round command is displayed. Is set (S2608), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2605, when it is determined that the currently received round number command is not the big hit 7th or 15th round (S2605: No), or in the process of S2606, the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on. If it is determined (S2606: No), the timing effect (operation effect) is not executable, and the process proceeds to S2609 without setting the timing effect setting flag 223w on.

  In the processing of S2609, it is determined whether the currently received round number command is the 8th or 16th round jackpot (S2609). If it is determined that it is the 8th or 16th round (S2609: Yes) Then, it is determined whether or not the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S2610). That is, the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (timing effect (operation effect) can be executed) in the 8th round or the 16th round immediately before this time (7th round or 15th round) Whether or not a certain condition is satisfied). In the process of S2610, when the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2610: Yes), next, the timing effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and the display effect round command is set (S2611). ). Then, the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S2612), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to OFF (S2613), and this process ends. In the process of S2611, the timing effect information to be read is set in a timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60) described later based on the timing effect setting flag 223w being set to ON. Detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2609, when it is determined that the currently received round number command is not the big win 8th or 16th round (S2609: No), or in the process of S2610, the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON. If it is determined that it has not been set (set to OFF), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2614), and this process ends.

  The various display round number commands set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving various display round number commands, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the current round number is determined based on the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. For example, by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be eliminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, an effect is executed that selects the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot in the first round (the first round). (See FIG. 17). Furthermore, a condition (storage flow path) where the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed at the time of the round (7 or 15 round) before the round (8 or 16 round) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed. 700e (see FIG. 3) that the upper limit amount of spheres is stored), and if the condition is satisfied, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the next round The notice effect for notifying is executed (see FIG. 11A). Then, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 11B).

  Thus, since the notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the player is caused to operate the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). It can be made known beforehand that an effect is executed. Further, in the round in which the notice effect is executed, it is determined that a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the notice effect is executed only when the condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the notice effect is executed.

  Furthermore, since the fact that the upper limit number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 700e is set as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the effect used as the timing effect (operation effect) Can be fixed to the effect using five, and the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced. The condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not limited to this, and a condition that a predetermined number (for example, one) of spheres are stored may be used. The timing effect (operation effect) may be executed regardless of whether or not is stored. Further, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e may be determined, and the timing effect (operation effect) may be changed based on the determination result. Specifically, the number of times of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b for changing the storage channel 700e to the release state is an effect mode corresponding to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e. Regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e, a specific timing effect (operation effect), that is, the number of operations of the second frame button (release button) 22b is fixed. It is also possible to configure so as to execute a timing effect (operation effect).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the difficulty of the timing effect (operation effect) can be selected for the player, the player can produce the timing effect (operation effect) in accordance with his / her skill level. Can be set, so that the player can actively participate in the game.

  In addition, this embodiment is configured to execute the notice effect when the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. That is, the player is informed that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is established based on the execution of the notice effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e and the number of pools necessary for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and It is preferable to execute an effect that encourages storage of the sphere in the storage channel 700e. Thereby, in addition to the game in which the player wins the ball in the special winning opening 65a during the jackpot, the player performs a game in which the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, in order to store the ball in the storage flow path 700e, the ball is continuously launched even when the variable winning device 65 during the big hit is closed (interval state). Can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds provided as jackpots is 8 rounds and jackpots (the jackpot type is “jackpot B”) and 16 rounds jackpots (the jackpot types are “jackpot A” and “jackpot C”). Provided. That is, in the case of 8 rounds, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed once during the jackpot game, and in the case of 16 rounds, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the jackpot game. The maximum number of times is set to 2 times. Thereby, it becomes possible to vary the privilege provided according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In this embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example, the storage flow path 700e. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) of spheres are stored, a timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play a game that more actively stores the ball in the storage channel 700e.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2503 that the hit-related command received this time is not a round number command (S2503: No), it is next determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from the main controller 110 when each round of jackpot is completed. If it is determined in the processing of S2506 that an interval command has been received (S2506: Yes), the number of rounds completed is calculated based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the calculated result is the seventh or fifteenth round. It is determined whether or not the end is indicated (S2507).

  In the process of S2507, when it is determined that the interval command received this time is an interval command indicating the end of the seventh or fifteenth round (S2507: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2508). If it is determined to be on (S2508: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2509), the corresponding display interval command is set (S2509), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 54, whether or not a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied in the round (the seventh or 15th round) in which the notice effect is executed. The timing effect setting flag 223w is turned on and the timing effect (operation effect) is executed at the timing when the round (7th or 15th round) is completed. It is determined again whether the conditions for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are satisfied, and based on the determination result, the timing effect setting flag 223w can be set to ON.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not a condition capable of executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied until immediately before the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, Opportunities for providing timing effects (operation effects) to the player can be increased. In this case, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed without executing the notice effect. Therefore, an unexpected timing effect (operation effect) can be provided to the player who has been disappointed without the notice effect being executed.

  Although details are not shown, the processing of S2507 to S2509 is performed when the timing effect setting flag 223w is already set to ON in the big hit effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54). Is configured to be skipped. Thereby, unnecessary processing can be prevented from being executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2506 that no interval command has been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether a jackpot ending command has been received (S2511). If the jackpot ending command is received in the processing of S2511 (S2511: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2512), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2513), and this processing is terminated. Also, in the process of S2511, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2511: No), this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2114). This variation display setting process (S2114) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command for the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (completely missed, missed reach, jackpot), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. S2114), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2709. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the current special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each process of S2702 to S2708 is executed.

  More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern (S2704). ). In the process of S2704, when a special pattern fluctuation start process (see S213 in FIG. 35) of the main controller 110 receives a fluctuation pattern command in which “out of chance” or “chance reach” is determined as the fluctuation type of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern. In the processing of S2704, when it is determined that the acquired variation pattern is a chance pattern (S2704: Yes), it is then determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2705), and it is determined that it is on. In this case (S2705: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2706), assuming that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation type of the variation pattern capable of executing the chance effect (operation effect) is received, it is established that the sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e. Although a chance effect (operation effect) is executed as a condition, the chance effect (operation effect) may be executed without determining the presence or absence of a ball on the storage channel 700e. Thereby, when a sphere flows into the storage channel 700e during the chance effect, the sphere can be easily entered into the specific general entrance 630.

  Then, a display variation pattern command is set (S2707), and then 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c). Then, based on the subtracted value, the data in the prize information storage area included in the command storage area is shifted (S2709), and the process proceeds to S2709, while the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is the chance pattern. If it is determined that it is not (S2704: No), or if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not ON (OFF) in the processing of S2705 (S2705: No), that is, the present variation display setting In the process (S2114), a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. If it is determined that to not, skips the processing of S2706, the process proceeds to S2707.

  In the process of S2709, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2709). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2709: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2709 that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2709: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2710), and then a command determination process (FIG. 50). In the process of S2206 of (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2711), and the acquired stop type is set (S2712). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2713), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the ball passage monitoring process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the ball passage monitoring process (S2115). This ball passage monitoring process (S2115) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the storage flow path 700e in the panel unit 700 (see FIG. 3). This is a process for monitoring the passage of a sphere that has flowed down (see FIG. 3).

  In the ball passage monitoring process (S2115), first, it is determined whether or not the release state flag 223q is on (S2801). Here, if it is determined that the release state flag 223q is not on (is off), this processing ends because the storage channel 700e is not in a release (open) state in which the sphere can flow down. If it is determined in the processing of S2801 that the release state flag 223q is on (S2801: Yes), it is next determined whether the ball passage flag 223n is on (S2802). If it is determined in step S2802 that the ball passage flag 223n is off (S2802: No), then whether the ball has passed the first ball passage sensor S3 based on the detection result of the first ball passage sensor S3. Is discriminated (S2803). If it is determined in the processing of S2803 that the sphere has passed (S2803: Yes), the sphere passing flag 223n is set to ON (S2804), the passing counter 223ae is set to “1” (S2805), and the processing of S2806 is performed. Migrate to

  That is, in the processing of S2801 to S2805 described above, the period when the release state flag 223q is set to ON and the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the flow (passage) of the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e. A process for starting the measurement is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2802 that the ball passage flag 223n is on (S2802: Yes), the period measurement has already started, so the processes of S2803 to S2805 are skipped. The process moves to S2806. Further, in the process of S2803, when it is determined that the first sphere passage sensor S3 has not detected the passage of the sphere (S2803), immediately after the storage flow path 700e is changed to the released state, the sphere still remains. Since the first ball passing sensor S3 has not been reached, the present process is terminated.

  In the processing of S2806, it is determined whether or not there is a sphere entering the specific general entrance 630 (S2806). In the process of S2806, when it is determined that there is no ball entering the specific general entrance 630 (S2806: No), it is then determined whether the second ball passage sensor S4 detects the passage of the ball ( In S2807), when the passage of the sphere is not detected (S2807: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the passage counter 223ae has reached the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second) (S2808). In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S2808: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage counter 223ae (S2809), and this process ends. In this way, when the value of the passage counter 223ae is set to “1” in the processing of S2805, the ball enters the specific general entrance 630, or the passage detection of the ball by the second ball passage sensor S4, or Every time this process is executed (every 1 ms), the value of the passage counter 223ae is incremented by “1” until the value of the passage counter 223ae reaches the upper limit (added to a value indicating 1 second).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2806, when it is determined that there is a ball entering the specific general entrance 630 (S2806: Yes), the ball passing period (the ball is the first one based on the value of the current passing counter 223ae). (S2811) is calculated from the period from passing through the one-ball passing sensor S3 to entering the specific general entrance 630 (S2811), and information indicating the calculated passing period is set in the sphere passing information storage area 223ac (S2812). ), The process proceeds to S2813. Also, in the process of S2807, when the second sphere passage sensor S4 detects the passage of the sphere (S2812: Yes), the sphere passage period (the sphere is the first sphere passage sensor) based on the current value of the passage counter 223ae. The period from passing through S3 to passing through the second ball passage sensor S4 is calculated (S2811), the process of S2812 is executed, and the process proceeds to S2813.

  In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the value of the passage counter 223ae is the upper limit value (a value indicating 1 second) (S2808: Yes), a predetermined period after the first sphere passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the sphere. Since the ball does not enter the specific general entrance 630 during 1 second and does not pass through the second ball passage sensor S4, there is a possibility that the ball is clogged. Is set (S2810), and the process proceeds to S2813.

  In the process of S2813, since the process for the sphere detected by the first sphere passing sensor S3 is completed, the sphere passing flag 223n is set to OFF (S2813), and the value of the passing counter 223ae is reset (S2814). This process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, in the ball passage monitoring process (S2115), a process of correcting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the period information indicating the ball passage period stored in the ball passage information storage area 223ac. Is done. Specifically, based on the period until the sphere that has flowed down the storage channel 700e passes through the specific general entrance 630 or the second sphere passing sensor S4, the second is shown to the player in the timing effect (operation effect). A correction process for changing the display timing of the effect pointer that suggests the timing of operating the frame button (release button) 22b is executed. The detailed contents of this correction processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but the timing effect (operation effect) is corrected by correcting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the passage period of the sphere. An effect mode to be executed and an actual ball flow situation can be associated more deeply, and an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, a reference period required for a sphere that has passed through the first sphere passage sensor S3 to enter the specific general entrance 630 and a sphere that has passed the first sphere passage sensor S3 are specified in general. The mounting position of the second ball passage sensor S4 is determined so that the reference period required to enter the entrance 630 is the same. Thereby, using both the passage period calculated when a sphere enters the specific general entrance 630 and the passage period calculated when the sphere passes through the second sphere passage sensor S4, It is possible to determine whether the timing effect needs to be corrected.

  Note that the method for measuring the passage period is not limited to the above-described contents, and for example, the passage period based on when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated). May be configured such that the passage period is measured only when the measurement starts or when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630. In addition, the arrangement position of the second ball passage sensor S4 is not limited to the present embodiment, and the second ball passage sensor S4 is provided at a location having a passage period different from the passage period of the ball entering the specific general entrance 630. May be provided.

  Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2116) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the storage state monitoring process (S2116). This storage state monitoring process (S2116) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the storage flow path 700e in the panel unit 700 (see FIG. 3). This is a process for determining that a sphere is stored on the top (see FIG. 3).

  Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are provided as storage devices capable of storing the balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of five storage devices are provided. The sphere can be stored. Each storage device includes a first storage valve 770a and a second storage valve 771a. The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are second frame buttons (release buttons) that can be operated by the player. Based on the operation (pressing) being performed on 22b, operation control is performed so that the stored spheres flow down one by one. Further, in the present embodiment, the storage detection sensor S2 that can detect the presence of the first sphere stored when the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the upper limit number of spheres (5 And a storage upper limit sensor S1 that can detect that the spheres are stored, and the storage state of the spheres on the storage flow path 700e can be determined.

  In the storage state monitoring process (S2116), first, it is determined whether the storage detection sensor S2 is on (S2851). When it is determined in the process of S2851 that the storage detection sensor S2 is on (S2851: Yes), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2852), and it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on. In the case (S2852: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, in the process of S2852, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2852: Yes), the process of S2853 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2856.

  Further, in the process of S2851, when it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 is off (S2851: No), it is then determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2854), and it is determined that it is on. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF (S2855), and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, in the process of S2854, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is OFF (S2854: No), the process of S2855 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2856. Thus, the setting of the storage state flag 223k is configured to be updated as needed based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2.

  In the process of S2856, it is determined whether the storage upper limit sensor S1 is on (S2856). In the process of S2856, when it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is ON, that is, when it is determined that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in the storage flow path 700e (S2856: Yes), the storage upper limit flag. It is determined whether 223m is set to ON (S2857). If the storage upper limit flag 223m is OFF (S2857: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2858). If it is determined that the status flag 223k is on (S2858: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on (S2859), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2858, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is OFF (S2858: No), the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects the sphere even though the storage detection sensor S2 does not detect the sphere. Since it is in the detected state, an error command is set (S2860), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is on in the processing of S2857 (S2857: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S2856, when it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is off (S2856: No), it is next determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2861), and is not on (off). (S2861: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is on in S2861 (S2861: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2862), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2116) in this embodiment, the storage state of the sphere on the storage channel 700e and the presence or absence of abnormality of the sphere storage are determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage) Since the upper limit flag 223m) and an error command can be set, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 700e.

  Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this lamp output processing (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. Process. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, as the lamp display device 227, a decorative lamp 227a used for effects and the like provided throughout the pachinko machine 10, and a panel unit 700 (FIG. 3). The cover member 710 provided so as to cover a part of the cover member 710 is provided with a transmissive lamp 227b for making the inside of the cover member 710 visible to the player, and other lamp 227c. It has been.

  When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the present time is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, the predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) that is timed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. If it is determined in S2901 that it is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command is set (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided to prevent the player from visually recognizing the operation state of the movable valve 750 in the normal gaming state. As described above, the cover member 710 is configured to change from a shielded state in which the inside is difficult to see to a transmissive state in which the inside can be seen by irradiating predetermined light (light from the transmitting lamp) from the back surface. Yes. The transmission lamp is lit regardless of the gaming state during a predetermined period (a predetermined period after the start-up process is executed) after turning on the power to the gaming machine. Thereby, immediately after turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, that is, at the timing when the store clerk inspects the pachinko machine 10, the inside of the panel unit 700 covered with the cover member 710 can be easily visually recognized.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2901 that the current time is not within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) ( Next, it is determined whether or not the first sphere passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the sphere (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command is issued so that the player can visually recognize the ball that has passed the first ball passage sensor S3. The setting is made (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905. In this case, the transmission lamp lighting command is set so that the transmission lamp 227b is turned on for a sufficient time (for example, 0.7 seconds) for the sphere to pass through the region covered with the cover member 710. However, for example, the transmission lamp 227b is configured to be extinguished on the condition that a sphere has entered the specific general entrance 630 or that the second sphere passage sensor S4 has detected the passage of the sphere. May be. Accordingly, the period during which the cover member 710 is in the transmissive state can be minimized, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation state of the movable valve 750.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the board surface unit 700, it is difficult to visually recognize an area where the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e can flow down (an area where the specific general entrance 630 and the movable valve 750 are provided). Is covered with a cover member 710 (see FIG. 2). This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the operating status of the movable valve 750, but when the ball passes through the area covered by the cover member 710, the player can grasp the whereabouts of the ball. There was a risk of dissatisfaction with the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined by the detection of the sphere by the first sphere passage sensor S3 that the sphere passes through the area covered by the cover member 710, and the cover member 710 is changed to the transmission state. By configuring in this way, the player can be surely grasped the passage (downflow) situation of the ball, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, in a normal state (in a state where the transmission lamp is not lit), the cover member that is in a state in which the inside cannot be visually recognized is changed to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized, so that the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 A change is given and it can make it easy for a player to notice that a ball passes through a portion covered with a cover member 710.

  In the process of S2902, if the first sphere passage sensor S3 does not detect the passage of a sphere (S2902: No), it is then determined whether a specific effect is being executed (S2903). If it is determined in the process of S2903 that the specific effect is being executed (S2903: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command is set based on the effect mode of the specific effect (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905. Here, the specific effect determined in the process of S2903 is when the display variation pattern command set in the variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 is a specific effect. While the effect is being executed, the effect mode using the transmission lamp lighting command is executed. Thereby, since it becomes possible to change the cover member 710 to the transparent state only when the specific condition is established in the variation effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, while allowing the player to grasp the operation state of the movable valve, It is possible to provide a game that allows the second frame button (release button) 22b to be operated by itself. In addition, a privilege (a privilege that allows the cover member 710 to pass through) that is advantageous to the player may be given to a player who has played a game in which a special symbol lottery is executed regardless of the special symbol lottery result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed. For example, the specific effect is being executed (the specific effect is set). ) State, it is determined whether or not a sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e, and only when it is determined that the sphere is stored, an effect of lighting the transmission lamp 227b is executed, and the sphere is not stored. If it is determined that, the effect of lighting the decoration lamp 227a provided near the cover member 710 instead of the transmission lamp 227b may be executed. By comprising in this way, by making cover member 710 needlessly change to a permeation | transmission state, it can suppress making a player visually recognize the operation condition of movable valve 750 unnecessarily.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the variation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 55) of the audio lamp control device 113, when the set variation pattern command for display is a specific effect, the effect of turning on the transmission lamp 227b. In other cases, for example, after the last jackpot, the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) for a special symbol has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 500) without winning a jackpot On this condition, the cover member 710 may be in a transmissive state, or the transmission member of the transmissive lamp may be in a transmissive state so that the cover member 710 is in a transmissive state while a predetermined time is being measured by a real time clock (RTC). Lighting control may be executed. In addition, when the cover member 710 is configured to transmit for a long period of time (a period in which the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) or a period of time is long (for example, 10 minutes)), You may make it display the guidance display which guides the game which launches a ball | bowl toward the storage flow path 700e on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify the game that the player is advantageous.

  Returning to FIG. 58, the description will be continued. In the process of S2903, when it is determined that the specific effect is not executed (S2903: No), or after the process of S2904 is finished, a decoration lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state). (S2905), and this process is terminated. Various decorative lamp lighting commands are set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current gaming state, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2107) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process (2107), it is monitored whether or not the frame buttons (first frame button 22a and second frame button 22b) operated by the player to enhance the production effect are pressed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation on the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is displayed. Various flags are set based on the setting and the operation content.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the frame buttons (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is a pressing success period. Frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame) in a period for setting a display command for displaying an effect (success effect, failure effect) based on the timing or selecting a difficulty level of a timing effect (operation effect) Based on the operation of the button 22b), a process of setting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). If it is determined in the processing of S3001 that the effect execution flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), it is next determined whether the release operation flag 223p is on (S3002). In the process of S3002, when it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is on (S3002: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to off (S3003), and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release operation flag is OFF (S3002: No), it is then determined whether the second frame button 22a has been operated (pressed) (S3004).

  In the process of S3004, when it is determined that the second frame button 22a has not been operated (pressed) (S3004: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3004 that the second frame button 22a has been operated (pressed) (S3004: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the first frame button (effect button) 22 a is configured to output an operation signal based on an operation to the sound lamp control device 113. The second frame button (release button) 22b is configured to output an operation signal based on an operation to the main controller 110. The timing effect (operation effect) at which the effect mode is set by the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the operation on the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b described above. The effect mode (effect result) is configured to be variable.

  Therefore, in the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2107) in FIG. 59, the process of determining whether or not there is an operation (pressing) on the first frame button (production button) 22a (S3004), and cancellation from the main control device 110 A process (S3002) for determining whether or not there is an operation (pressing) on the second frame button (release button) 22b based on the setting content of the release operation flag 223p that is set to ON when an operation command is received is executed. The As a result, the operation contents for a plurality of operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) for outputting operation signals to different control means (main control device 110, sound lamp control device 113) are collected. It is possible to smoothly set the production mode corresponding to the operation on each operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and enhance the production effect.

  In the present embodiment, prior to the process of determining the operation on the first frame button 22a (S3004), the process of determining the setting content of the release operation flag 223p indicating the operation status on the second frame button 22b (S3002). Is configured to be executed. This is because when both the frame buttons (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) are operated simultaneously, an effect is executed based on the operation on the second frame button 22b. That is, in the present embodiment, the second frame button (release button) 22b changes the state of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the closed (non-released) state to the open (released) state. The first frame button provided simply for production because it is an operating means provided to vary, and a privilege can be given to the player by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. (Produce button) 22a is greatly different in influence on the game. Therefore, in the timing effect (operation effect), the presence / absence determination of the operation on the second frame button (release button) 22b that can affect the game result is determined more than the determination of the presence / absence of the first frame button (effect button) 22a. Increases priority. With such a configuration, an effect that is executed using both an operation on the operation means that can affect the game result and an operation on the operation means for the effect that does not affect the game result ( In the timing effect (operation effect), an effect corresponding to the game result can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 59, the description will be continued. In the process of S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the button type detected to be pressed is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y (S3005). That is, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is on and the process proceeds to S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the second frame button 22b is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y, and S3004 is performed. If it is determined that the first frame button 22a has been pressed in the process, and the process proceeds to S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the first frame button 22a is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y.

  When the processing of S3005 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current frame button operation was performed during the successful pressing period based on the pressing period information read out by the processing of S3005 (S3006). If it is determined that it is not during the pressing success period (S3006: No), a display failure effect command is set (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3011. Here, when the display failure effect command is set, “bad” is displayed as the result display mode 720 as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3006, when it is determined that the pressing has been successful (S3006: Yes), it is determined whether the operation determined in this process is the second frame button (release button) 22b. (S3008). In the process of S3008, when it is determined that the operation is the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b (S3008: Yes), the display release button successful effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3011. . In the process of S3008, when it is determined that the operation is not the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b but the operation of the first frame button (production button) 22a (S3008: No), the display effect. A button success effect command is set (S3010), and the process proceeds to S3011.

  Here, when the display release button success production command is set, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720 and the second frame button 22b is schematically shown as shown in FIG. The left button display 715 shown is changed to the pressed state. When the display effect button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. 11A, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the first frame button 22a is schematically shown. The middle button display 716 is changed to the pressed state. Furthermore, in the current timing effect (operation effect), when a ball has entered the specific general entrance 630, the specific entrance display mode 721 indicating that fact is a ball to the specific general entrance 630. Are displayed in a mode ("15" indicating the number of prize balls) indicating a privilege given to the player by entering the ball.

  Returning to FIG. 59, the description will be continued. In the process of S3011, it is determined whether the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S3011). If the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is off in the process of S3011, (S3011: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is on (S3011: Yes), it is determined whether the first frame button 22a is pressed (S3012), and if it is pressed (S3012: Yes). Next, the difficulty level information indicating the selected difficulty level is set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa (S3013), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to OFF (S3014), and this process ends. If it is determined in step S3012 that the first frame button 22a has not been pressed (S3012: No), the process ends.

  Next, the timing effect setting process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect setting process (S2111). This timing effect setting process (S2111) is a process for setting the content of the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed.

  When the timing effect setting process (S2111) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S3101). If it is determined in the process of S3101 that the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S3101: Yes), then it is determined whether the current big hit is made (S3102), and the big win is determined. (S3102: Yes), the jackpot timing effect presetting process (S3103) for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is executed, and the process proceeds to S3105. This jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3102 that the game is not a big hit (S3102: No), the normal timing effect pre-setting process for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the variation display of the special symbol is performed. (S3104) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3105. The normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3105, a timing effect common setting process that is executed in common at any timing (big hit, normal) is executed (S3105). Exit. The timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S3101 that the timing effect setting flag 223w is off (S3101: No), a timing effect correction process (S3106) for correcting the entry timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is performed. After that, this process is terminated. The timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 61A, the jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) will be described. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103). This jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) is a frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) in the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed based on the difficulty set during the jackpot. The sound (sound effect) output at the time of operation is set.

  When the big hit timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) is executed, first, the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is read (S3131), and pointer setting conditions corresponding to the read difficulty level are acquired. (S3132). Specifically, from the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa, the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b, the timing at which a ball can enter the specific general entrance 630, and , The number of operations of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the display mode information of the effect pointer corresponding to the difficulty level are acquired.

  When the processing of S3132 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the read difficulty level information is low (S3133). If it is determined in the processing of S3133 that the difficulty level information is low difficulty level (S3133: No), the range 1 data 222c2 indicating the low difficulty level is read from the music information storage area 222c (S3134), and the range 1 is supported. A voice command is set (S3135), and this process ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 1 indicates the high sound range of the music information, high sound (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to it.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3133 that the difficulty level information is a high difficulty level (S3133: No), the range 2 data 222c3 indicating the high difficulty level is read from the music information storage area 222c (S3136). A corresponding voice command is set (S3137), and this process ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 2 indicates a low sound range in the music information, a low sound (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61 (b), the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104) will be described. FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104). In the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104), when the lottery result of the target special symbol is a win, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated during the successful pressing period. Settings are made so that the lottery result is notified.

  When the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104) is executed, first, the low difficulty pointer setting condition is acquired (S3151), and then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation is a win variation ( S3152). If it is determined in the process of S3152 that the hit is changing (S3152: Yes), the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3153), and the number of pointer displays is determined from the pointer setting condition acquired in the process of S3151. Is subtracted by 1 (S3154), and this process ends.

  Next, the timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect common setting process (S3105). This timing effect common setting process (S3105) is a jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (see S3103 in FIG. 61A) or a normal timing effect pre-setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 61B). ) Is executed based on the pointer setting condition of the timing effect (operation effect) set by) and the operation status of the movable valve 750.

  When the timing effect common setting process (S3105) is executed, first. Based on the current movable state (movable state) of the movable valve 750 stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the closing timing information until after 30 seconds is read from the closing timing storage area 223v (S3201). Then, the entry timing information stored in the entry timing storage area 223ad is read, and the entry timing information obtained by subtracting the entry timing information from the closing timing is calculated (S3202).

  And it is discriminate | determined whether there exists a timing with which the pointer setting conditions of this timing effect (operation effect) and the entrance possible timing information calculated in the process of S3202 correspond (S3203). Specifically, a location where the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the musical range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition matches the entrance timing information is set as the pointer setting condition. It is determined whether there is a part that matches as many times as there are matches. In this case, since the entry-possible timing information is calculated on the basis of the closing timing of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled according to a predetermined rule, music that is executed in a timing effect (operation effect) Is shifted within a predetermined period (10 seconds at the maximum) to determine whether there is a matching timing (see FIG. 16).

  In the process of S3203, when it is determined that there is a matching timing (S3203: Yes), the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect) is set based on the matching timing (S3204). On the other hand, in the process of S3203, If it is determined that there is no matching timing (S3203: No), a special pointer display position is set in addition to the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the musical range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition. A coincidence timing is created (S3205). Thereafter, the production start timing is set based on the created match timing (S3204).

  When the processing of S3204 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the winning pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3206). In the process of S3206, when it is determined that the winning pointer setting flag 223af is on (S3206: Yes), that is, the current timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the variation effect of the special symbol won. If it is, the second frame button (release button) is set to a non-match point where the pointer setting condition of the current timing effect (operation effect) does not match the entering timing information calculated in the process of S3202. One display pointer for operating 22b is set (S3207), the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to OFF (S3208), and the process proceeds to S3209. On the other hand, in the process of S3206, when it is determined that the winning pointer setting flag 223af is OFF (S3206: No), the processes of S3207 and S3208 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3209.

  By configuring in this way, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a non-matching point that does not match the entry timing information in the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the change of the special symbol. It is possible to set a display pointer. Thereby, even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entrance 630 is displayed. When the ball does not enter, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol being fluctuated is a big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When such a configuration is used, when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer set as the non-match point described above, You may comprise so that the lottery result of a special symbol may be alert | reported to the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Thereby, operation of the 2nd frame button (release button) 22b can be used as a means for alert | reporting the lottery result of a special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the display pointer is set to the non-match point described above only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, but in other cases, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol is a win. Even if it is not, it may be configured to set a non-match point.

  In the processing of S3209, display pointers for the number of matches set in the pointer setting condition are set (S3209), the set display pointer (the display pointer set in the processing of S3207, and the processing pointer set in the processing of S3209). The successful pressing period is determined in correspondence with the display pointer) and set in the pressing period information storage area 223y (S3210). When the processing of S3210 is completed, it is then determined whether the current big hit is made (S3211). If it is decided that the big hit is made (S3211: Yes), various contents set in the current processing are temporarily displayed. The data is stored in the storage area 223r (S3215), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3211 that the present is not a big hit (S3211: No), a display timing effect command is set based on various contents set in the current process (S3212), and the effect is being executed. The flag 223x is set to ON (S3213), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to OFF (S3214), and this process ends.

  Next, the timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect correction process (S3106). In this timing effect correction process (S3106), a process for correcting the timing at which it is possible to enter the specific general entrance 630 set in the timing effect (operation effect) based on the actual ball passing period is executed. . Here, in this embodiment, the entrance timing (normal) in which the passing period of the sphere is set to 0.5 seconds as the entrance timing, and the entrance timing (early) in which the passing period of the sphere is set to 0.4 seconds. And a ball entry timing (slow) in which the ball passage period is set to 0.6 seconds can be selected and set in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad. Then, based on the entrance timing information set in this process, the passing period of the ball corresponding to the entrance timing information set in the entrance timing storage area 223ad is subtracted from the closing timing information of the movable valve 750. Thus, the timing for entering the specific general entrance 630 is set.

  When the timing effect correction process (S3106) is executed, first, the passage period set in the ball passage information storage area 223ac is read (S3301), the read passage period is analyzed, the passage period (short), and the passage The number of information for the period (normal) and the passage period (long) is calculated (S3302). Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated number of pieces of passage period information is equal to or greater than the number of pieces of information of the passage period (long) (S3303). In the process of S3303, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) is less than the number of pieces of information in the passage period (short) (S3303: No), the calculated passage period information number is then passed through (normal). It is determined whether the number of pieces of information is equal to or greater than the number of pieces of information in the passage period (short) (S3304). In the process of S3304, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passage period (normal) is equal to or more than the number of pieces of information in the passage period (short) (S3304: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3304 that the number of pieces of information of the passage period (short) is larger (S3304: No), it is determined whether or not the currently set entry timing information is the entry timing (slow). It is determined (S3305). If it is determined in the processing of S3305 that the timing is not the slow timing (S3305: No), the timing (early) is selected as the timing at which it is possible to enter the specific general entrance 630, and the timing is stored. The area is set (S3306), and then this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3305 that the timing of entering the ball is late (S3305: Yes), the timing (normal) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630, and the ball enters The timing storage area is set (S3310), and then this process ends.

  In the processing of S3303, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information of the passage period (long) is equal to or more than the number of pieces of information of the passage period (short) (S3303: Yes), the calculated number of pieces of passage period information is the passage period. It is determined whether the number of (normal) information is greater than or equal to the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) (S3307). In the process of S3307, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passage period (normal) is equal to or greater than the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) (S3307: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3307 that the number of pieces of information in the passage period (normal) is less than the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) (S3307: No), then the currently set entry timing information is the entry ball It is determined whether it is timing (early) (S3308). If it is determined in the process of S3308 that it is not the entry timing (early) (S3308: No), the timing (slow) is selected as the timing at which entry can be made to the specific general entrance 630, and the entry timing is stored. The area is set (S3309). On the other hand, in the process of S3308, when it is determined that it is the entry timing (early) (S3305: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described process of S3310, and then this process ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the sphere passes through a predetermined section (the section from the first sphere passage sensor S3 to the specific general entrance 630 or the second sphere passage sensor S4). Based on the passage period information obtained by measuring the period required for the time, the timing at which the player can enter the specific general entrance 630 is corrected by varying the entrance timing period subtracted from the closing timing of the movable valve 750. Although other configurations may be used, for example, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing in the case where the storage device is released or the timing production (operation production). This may be set as a start condition, and a period from when the start condition is set to when it passes through the specific general entrance 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4 may be measured. Even if comprised in this way, there can exist an effect similar to this embodiment.

  Moreover, even if it corrects so that a display pointer may be displayed at a suitable timing by changing the progress degree of the effect performed based on passage period information instead of changing a pitch timing period. good.

  Next, the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112). In this movable valve operation counter update process (S2112), a process for updating the movable valve operation counter 223t for updating the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 is executed.

  When the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a movable valve operation scenario is set (S3401). If it is determined that there is no setting in the process of S3401 (S3401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a setting (S3401: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the movable valve operation counter is the upper limit value (S3402). Here, the value of the movable valve operation counter is a value necessary for executing the 24 operation scenarios set in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, and the counter value corresponding to 732 seconds is set as the upper limit value. Has been.

  In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S3402: No), 1 is added to the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t (S3403), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3402 that it is the upper limit value (S3402: Yes), the value of the movable valve operation counter is set to 1 (S3404), and this process ends. Thereby, the operation state of the movable valve 750 can be grasped at any time on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets an instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S5102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S5001 in FIG. 65). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) (S5105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S5001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 66, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S5102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S5101. The processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S5102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S5003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S5004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S5005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 76A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S6502 of FIG. 76A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67 (b)), the simple command determination process (FIG. 67 (b) S5308) and simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 67B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S5005, interrupt permission is set (S5006). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 67B is a flowchart showing this V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 32) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S5302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S5303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S5303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S5305) are used. 32 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach completely The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the missed and chance chances) are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5304.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 68, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S5403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S5403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S5404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), the process returns to S5401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S5405) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S5501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S5501 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S5503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S5503, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S5504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5506), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S5502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S5504, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406). If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S5407), and the processing returns to S5401.

  Details of the stop type command process (S5407) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S5601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S5602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S5603), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is described. In the task process (S5304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S5603, and the identification is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S5601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S5602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S5406 that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S5408). If there is a command opening command (S5408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

  Details of the opening command processing (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S5701 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5705), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S5704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame image to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S5702. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. After the display round number command is received, the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 15 rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S5408 that there is no display opening command (S5408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S5410). If there is a round number command for use (S5410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S5411), and the processing returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5702).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5410 that there is no display round number command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S5412). If there is an ending command for use (S5412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S5413), and the processing returns to S5401.

  Details of the ending command process (S5413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5901, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S5412 that there is no display ending command (S5412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5414). If there is a change command (S5414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S5415), and the process returns to S5401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S5415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6503) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S6001). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back images corresponding to other back image types The determination flag is set to OFF (S6002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S6001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S6002. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the task processing is performed based on the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S6002. The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored (A resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and an address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S5414 that there is no rear image change command (S5414: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S5416). If this is the case (S5416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S5417), and processing returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S5417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S6101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S6102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S6101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S6102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON in the process of S6102. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S5416 (S5416: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S5418), and the processing returns to S5401.

  In the processing of S5401, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes). ), The processing of S5402 to S5418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S5401 to S5418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S5401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 69 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 69 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S5501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S5303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 73, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S6202 to S6204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S6202), S6203 to S6204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6204).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6301).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to S6205.

  In S6205, pointer update processing is executed (S6205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6403), and if it is a demo display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), this processing is terminated, and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6406). ), This process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which End information is written is set. Since the drawn contents are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S6206 together with the warning image developed in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S6208: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S6209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is on (S6209: Yes), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing (S5304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S6215. Then, by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S6209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S6216). If the demo display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S6217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  If the demonstration display flag is on in the process of S6216 (S6216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. A process of setting the display data table that defines the display in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76 and FIG. 77, details of the transfer setting process (S5305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S6501, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S6601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S6601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S6602). In the process of S6602, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S6602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Also, as a result of the process of S6601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to S6603.

  In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S6603 (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 67B) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 67B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 73 to 77) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) (see S6601: No in FIG. 76A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the display setting process (S5303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6702), and if it is transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S6703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S6704), and the process proceeds to step S6705.

  In the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the processes of S6703 and S6704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6705. In the process of S 6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S 6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

  In the process of S6706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S6706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to S6707. Also, as a result of the processing of S6705, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6705: No), the processing proceeds to S6707.

  In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). If the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S6713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S6709). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S6709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S6710), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S6711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image indicated by the back image discrimination flag, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. A head address is acquired (S6712), and the process proceeds to S6713.

  In the process of S6713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713). The determination in the process of S6713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S6713 (S6713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S6713 (S6713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S6714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S6714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S6715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the details of the above-described drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated (S6801). That is, in the process of S6801, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S6802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 67B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 reaches the movable valve 750 at a timing when the movable valve 750 enters a guidance state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entrance 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage state of the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the release state, the storage devices (first storage device 770 and The sphere stored in the second storage device 771) can enter the specific general entrance 630. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and to actively participate in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and most of the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induction state (closed state) among the operation contents. However, it is set as a period (0.1 second) in which only one sphere can be guided. Therefore, since accuracy is required for the timing at which the balls stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general entrance 630, it is more ambitious to the player. Can play a game.

  In this embodiment, by operating the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b), the spheres stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) one by one. Since it is configured to be able to flow down toward the specific general entrance 630, as a period during which the movable valve 750 is in a guidance state (closed state), a period during which only one ball can be guided (0.1 second) ) Are set continuously, the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can be operated by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing. All the stored spheres can enter the specific general entrance 630. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the game in order to obtain more prize balls.

  A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of balls are allowed to flow out of the storage device in response to the operation of the operation means, and the number of balls to be flowed out of the storage device is varied based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means. You may do it. This makes it possible to provide more diverse games to the player and improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 710 is covered with the cover member 710 from the back surface side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710) at a portion (see FIG. 2) covered by the cover member 710 in the board surface unit 700. Transmitting lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiating light, are provided. The transmissive lamps 227ba to 227be irradiate the cover member 710 with light so that the player can see the inside covered with the cover member 710. Although details will be described later, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the sphere flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the releasing operation of the storage device while grasping the operation state of the movable valve 750 during the normal game where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In addition, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down around the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is in a transmissive state, so that the player can visually recognize the situation where the ball flows down around the movable valve 750. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operation state of the movable valve 750, the second frame button in a state where the operation state of the movable valve 750 is grasped. (Release button) The act of operating 22b can be prevented. Further, the cover member 710 that is a shielding means is a half mirror that switches to a transmissive state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is in a released state and the sphere flows down). Therefore, when the game ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is switched to the transmission state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the flow situation of the sphere flowing down near the movable valve 750.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 710 serving as a shielding unit is switched to a transmission state by irradiating light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. For example, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light applied to the cover member 710 from the light emitting means (LED) that is constantly lit is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which only the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside can be visually recognized, and a process for irregularly reflecting the irradiated light on the surface (for example, , Embossing). Thus, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 due to the light emitted from the decoration lamp 227a, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, the decoration In the state where the lamp 227a is not lit), the inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible. Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the store clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710.

  When such a configuration is used, a configuration is provided in which a shielding wall that shields the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a from being applied to the cover member 710 is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. It is good to provide. Thereby, even while the game is being performed, the player can visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710. Similarly to the first embodiment, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light is provided, and the light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that the inside of the cover member 710 May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which it is visible (a state in which light is not irradiated).

  Further, a decorative movable member is provided on the cover member 710 whose inside is visually recognized, and the operation of the movable member is controlled, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the operation of the decorative movable member is small). State) and a state in which the inside of the cover member 710 is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which there are many operations of the decorative movable member) may be switched.

  In this embodiment, the timing for operating the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b) is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is set. And effect display. As a result, the player can receive a privilege (a prize based on the entrance to the specific general entrance 630) by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the effect display executed by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Sphere) can be given, and the player can actively participate in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described effect (timing effect) is configured to be executed during a jackpot game or when a specific variation pattern is selected. However, the effect is described above when a predetermined condition other than that is satisfied. An effect (timing effect) may be configured to be executed. For example, when it is determined that the upper limit amount of the sphere has been stored in the storage channel 700e, or by a time measuring means (RTC or the like). In the production (so-called mini game, etc.) that causes the production button (first frame button) 22a to be executed during the special symbol change or the big hit game, A predetermined condition may be established when, for example, clear is established. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform a timing effect (operation effect) at various timings, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, when a predetermined winning command (a command output when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) is received from the main controller 110, it corresponds to the winning command. A timing effect (operation effect) may be executed using a period of an effect (so-called prefetch effect) that is executed before the change of the special symbol is started.

  In the present embodiment, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to cause one sphere to flow down toward the movable valve 750, and the second frame button (release button). ) 22b is configured to execute the release operation of the storage device only once every 2 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, if the second frame button (release button) 22b is not operated (pressed) in a timely manner, the ball cannot enter the specific general entrance 630, and the second frame button ( The operation accuracy of the release button 22b is required. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed on the third symbol display device 81. The second frame button (release button) 22b is operated according to the timing effect (operation effect) so that the ball can easily enter the specific general entrance 630. Yes. Thereby, the player can be motivated to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

  In the timing effect (operation effect) in the present embodiment, an effect that causes the player to operate the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. By configuring in this way, the number of times that the player can perform the button operation can be increased and the effect can be enhanced as compared with the case where the effect of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. Can do.

  In this embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is winning and changing, the display pointer that scrolls in the sub display area Ds4 coincides with the bar display unit 717. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the special symbol lottery result is displayed in the sub display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. By comprising in this way, the 2nd frame button (release button) 22b for canceling | releasing the storage state of a storage apparatus can be used in order to alert | report the lottery result of a special symbol.

  Further, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to notify the lottery result of the special symbol, the ball that has flowed out of the storage device based on the operation enters the specific general entrance 630. Difficult timing is set. Thereby, it can suppress that a privilege (prize ball with respect to the entrance of the ball | bowl to the specific general entrance 630) is provided to a player unnecessarily. In the case where such timing is set, it is preferable to perform a notification that suggests a big hit if a ball does not enter the specific general entrance 630. Thereby, since the privilege is given to the player whether or not the spilled ball enters the specific general entrance 630, it is possible to provide a sense of security to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of pieces of music can be used in the timing effect (operation effect), and a place where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) is predetermined for each music. This is for operating the operation means at a timing according to the rhythm of each musical piece in the timing effect (operation effect). With this configuration, the display pointer is displayed at a timing at which a specific general entrance 630 can be entered. Even if 719 is set, the operation means can be operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing effect (operation effect), and the timing effect (operation effect) can be performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect), the timing at which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated is determined from the location where the display pointer preset for each song can be displayed (set). Although it is configured to select, in the operation effect in which only the first frame button (effect button) 22a is operated, the above-described configuration may be used. As a result, various effects can be executed as an operation effect for operating the first frame button (effect button) 22a.

  In the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 is displayed during the period in which the jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed on the jackpot confirmation display screen that notifies the third symbol display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has been won. It is possible to determine whether or not the variable operation is performed with an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and to notify the determination result on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed. The game can be motivated.

  In the present embodiment, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill, and different privileges are given to the various players according to the difficulty level. On the other hand, a timing effect (operation effect) can be executed eagerly.

  Moreover, although the content mentioned above was the content which showed both selection of the music and selection of the difficulty in the timing effect (operation effect) performed by this embodiment, it is only a music, without changing a difficulty level. Since the interval between the locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) is different between the music A and the music B, the player who wants to enjoy the timing effect (operation effect) with a space is selected. A player who selects A and wants to enjoy a timing effect (operation effect) at short intervals can select a song B. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and various players can execute the timing effect (operation effect) eagerly. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the interval between places where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) varies depending on the music, and the player selects the music so that the display pointer that is executed in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed. Although a configuration for narrowing or widening the display interval is used, as another configuration, a selection means for selecting a display interval of the display pointer 719 executed in a timing effect (operation effect) for the player, Further, setting means for setting the display location of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection means may be provided, or the same music piece can be selected by changing the playback speed of the music piece. It is also possible to provide a setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719. Even when such a configuration is used, it becomes possible to execute a timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and for various players, Timing effects (operation effects) can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, in order for the sound lamp control device 113 to be able to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750, the movable valve operation scenario 222b is stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and information on the movable valve operation scenario 222b is stored. Is updated from time to time so that the current operation status and future operation content of the movable valve 750 can be grasped and the timing at which a ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 is set. Based on the information of the movable valve operation scenario 222b, an execution scenario for executing the movable operation of the decorative movable member and the output of the decorative lamp, sound (sound effect), etc. is generated, and based on the generated execution scenario The timing at which a ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 may be set indirectly. Further, in this case, it is preferable to execute the movable operation of the decorative movable member executed based on the execution scenario, and the output of the decorative lamp, sound (sound effect), etc. in a place where it is difficult for the player to grasp.

  In the first embodiment, two storage devices (a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771) are provided in the storage channel 700e, and a maximum of five spheres are stored, and the second frame button 22b is operated. Based on the above, the storage device is changed to the released (open) state and the sphere is allowed to flow out from the storage flow path 700e. However, other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. A plurality of storage channels 700e and 700g may be provided as described above. Here, with reference to FIG. 79, the modified example of the structure which stores a ball | bowl on the game board 13 is demonstrated. In this modification, the same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 79 is a partial front view of the game board 13 showing a modification of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79, the present modification is different from the first embodiment described above in that a second storage channel 700g is provided above the storage channel 700e, and the storage channel 700e is provided. The second storage valve 771a that has been provided is provided in the storage channel 700g, and a second storage upper limit sensor S5 and a second storage detection sensor S6 that detect a sphere stored in the storage channel 700g are provided. It is different in point. Although detailed description is omitted, in the first embodiment described above, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are controlled to operate using one storage valve solenoid 770b. However, the difference is that each storage valve is individually provided with a storage valve solenoid and a release button is provided corresponding to each storage device (storage valve) (for example, see FIG. 87 described later).

  The second storage flow path 700g newly provided in the present modification is formed so that the sphere is less likely to flow in than the storage flow path 700e, and the ball that collides with the first adjustment member 701a and rebounds. It is formed to allow inflow. Specifically, it is formed so that about one sphere flows into 30 spheres among the spheres flowing down the distribution channel 700d and distributed in the lower right direction (the direction of the storage channel 700e). Yes. It should be noted that the ratio of the spheres flowing into the second storage channel 700g can be adjusted by adjusting the angle and position of the adjusting member 701a.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in this modification, five spheres can be stored in the storage channel 700e, and five spheres can be stored in the second storage channel 700g, so that a total of 10 spheres can be stored. Yes. Furthermore, the sphere that has flowed into the second storage flow path 700g, which is less likely to flow into the storage flow path 700e, flows down toward the specific general entrance 630 without being affected by the variable operation of the movable valve 750. The exit is provided so as to face the specific general entrance 630. As a result, when the ball is stored in the flow path (second storage flow path 700g) where it is difficult to store the ball, the player can surely receive the privilege (the ball has entered the specific general entrance 630). Based prize balls). Therefore, since the player always plays the game while expecting the ball to flow into the second storage flow path 700g, the player can be prevented from getting bored early.

  Here, the flow of the game when the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 87 is used in this modification will be described. First, the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 87 will be described. FIG. 87 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of release buttons for releasing the storage device. This pachinko machine is provided with a third frame button (second release button) 22c and a release (open) of the first storage device 770 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 1). ) The control contents are changed so that the control is executed based on the operation of the second frame button 22b and the release (release) control of the second storage device 771 is executed based on the operation of the third frame button 22c. Is different. Other elements are the same, and the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a second frame button (release button) 22 b on the left side of the lower plate unit 15, and a third frame button (second release button) on the right side of the lower plate unit 15. Button) 22c. Since the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are arranged in the lower dish unit 15 with an interval of about 20 cm, the player However, it is difficult to operate with one hand at the same time. Between the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is connected to the second frame button (release button). Button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are projected so as to block the straight line connecting the button surfaces, and the player can simultaneously use the second frame button (for release) with one hand. Button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are made more difficult to operate.

  In addition, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed), control for changing the storage state of the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state is performed. When the third frame button (second release button) 22c is operated (pressed), the storage state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is changed to the release (open) state. Control is configured to be executed.

  Accordingly, the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at a desired timing, so that the storage according to the operation content of the player is performed. The release control of the device can be executed, and the player can actively participate in the game.

  In addition, since it is difficult for the player to simultaneously operate the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c with one hand, (Ie, while operating the operation handle 51 with one hand), the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are operated at the same time. Processing load due to simultaneous execution of release control of storage device (for example, movable valve movement control using electrical drive source), or simultaneous drive of electrical drive source (eg, solenoid, motor, etc.) Temporary increase in power consumption can be suppressed. When the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c simultaneously using both hands, the operation handle 51 is not operated. Since it is in a state, even if release control of a plurality of storage devices is executed at the same time, game control for operation to the operation handle 51 (for example, launch control using an electric drive source) is not executed, The processing load of the entire pachinko machine 10 or a temporary increase in power consumption due to simultaneous driving of an electric drive source (for example, a solenoid or a motor) can be suppressed.

  That is, by using this configuration, the release control for the two storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) and the game control (for example, launch control) for the operation on the operation handle 51 are performed simultaneously. The processing load in the pachinko machine 10 (control processing using an electrical drive source) and the power used (power used to drive the electrical drive source) temporarily increase. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. In the modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 79 (configuration in which the storage channel 700e and the second storage channel 700g are provided), the configuration in FIG. 87 described above (second frame button (release button)) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are used, the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is based on the operation on the second frame button 22b. ) Is in an open (released) state, a ball flows out of the storage channel 700e, and the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is in an open (released) state based on an operation on the third frame button 22c. Then, the sphere flows out from the storage channel 700g.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the sphere flow path is formed so that any of the spheres flowing out from the storage flow path 700e and the second storage flow path 700g can enter the specific general entrance 630. The spherical flow path is formed so that the sphere that has flowed out of the storage flow path 700e and the sphere that has flowed out of the second storage flow path 700g merge above the entrance 630. Thus, whether or not a sphere enters the specific general entrance 630 is determined according to the flow-down state of the sphere flowing out from each storage channel (storage channel 700e, second storage channel 700g). Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game by allowing the player to watch the movement of the ball.

  Also, according to the configuration shown in FIG. 87, the second frame button 22b and the third frame button 22c are arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate simultaneously with one hand, so that the ball is positioned above the specific general entrance 630. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the balls collide and a ball cannot enter the specific general entrance 630.

  The second storage channel 700g is provided with a second storage upper limit sensor S5 and a second storage detection sensor S6, and when the second storage upper limit sensor S5 detects a sphere, that is, the second storage channel. If it is detected that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in 700 g, even if a game (right-handed game) is executed in this state, no more balls can be stored in the second storage channel 700 g. , A notification prompting the player to operate the third frame button 22c (for example, a display prompting the user to press the third frame button 22c on the third symbol display device 81, a third frame button on the voice output device 226) A voice output that prompts the user to press the button 22c and a voice output that prompts the user to press the third frame button 22c by causing the third frame button 22c (or its surroundings) to emit light are executed. As a result, the game is continued with the upper limit of the amount of balls stored in the second storage flow path 700g where the outflowed ball can easily enter the specific general entrance 630, and a game disadvantageous to the player is performed. It is possible to suppress this.

  In the configuration of the present modification, the contents described in the description of the first embodiment described above may be appropriately combined. For example, based on a single operation on the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. The operation of the first storage valve 770a or the second storage valve 771a may be controlled so that only one ball flows out, or in one operation on the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. Based on this, it may be controlled to cause all the stored spheres to flow out. Further, the number of balls to be flowed out or the outflow timing of the balls may be made different based on the operation content (for example, normal pressing or long pressing) of the operation on the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. Thereby, the operating means (second frame button 22b, third frame button) operated by the player to cause the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) to flow out of the storage device. The operation timing and operation details of 22c) can be varied, and the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  In the present modification, the second storage flow path 700g is configured such that the stored sphere flows out to a location facing the specific general entrance 630, which is advantageous for the player. There are provided a channel (second storage channel 700g) and a storage channel (first storage channel 700e) that are disadvantageous to the channel, but one storage channel and the other storage channel. It is only necessary that the spheres are less likely to flow into the storage channel than the storage channel where the advantageous storage channel is disadvantageous.

  For example, a second movable valve is provided between the spherical outlet of the second storage channel 700g and the specific general entrance 630, and the second movable valve places a sphere more than the movable valve 750 in the specific general entrance 630. It may be configured such that the ratio of the induced state that can be guided to the height increases. Moreover, you may comprise so that the upper limit of the number of balls stored by each storage flow path may differ for every storage flow path.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b are configured separately as operation means that can be operated by the player. As a timing effect (operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operation means, a display pointer is provided for each operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b). An effect display for scrolling is executed.

  In contrast, in the second embodiment, instead of the operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b) in the first embodiment, a first frame button is used. (Produce button) 1122a and a second frame button (release button) 1122b are provided. Then, interlocking means for causing the second frame button (release button) 1122b to perform a pressing operation is provided in conjunction with the operation of the first frame button (production button) 1122a. The linked state in which the second frame button (release button) 1122b is operated based on the operation of the production button) 1122a and the second frame button (release button) based on the operation of the first frame button (production button) 1122a. ) 1122b is provided with variable control means for changing to a release state where 1122b is not operated.

  Thus, the timing effect (operation effect) for operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a for the player is executed, and the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 1122a. It is possible to operate the second frame button (release button) 1122b simply by executing. Therefore, the storage device can be released without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 22b are replaced with the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b. A frame button 1122b is provided. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 80, a first frame button 1122a and a second frame button 1122b are provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the configuration of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b in plan view, and FIG. 81 (b) is a linked operation configuration of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

  As shown in FIG. 81A, the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are configured to be connectable via the interlocking means 1125. The second frame button 1122b has a shape that is slightly smaller than the first frame button 1122a, and a restriction wall 1123 is provided around the second frame button 1122b. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the second frame button 1122b and pressing it by mistake when the player tries to operate the first frame button 1122a, for example, at an unintended timing.

  Next, detailed configurations of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described with reference to FIG. The first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b have a return means (for example, an elastic member using a spring member, a rubber member, etc.) for returning the pressed button to a normal position, and button operation is possible. Although a light emitting means for notifying that the period is short is provided, the above-described returning means and light emitting means employ well-known techniques that are generally used. Detailed explanation is omitted.

  A detection switch S22a is provided below the first frame button 1122a to detect that the pressing operation has been performed, and a detection switch S22b is provided below the second frame button 1122b to detect that the pressing operation has been performed. It has been. Thereby, it is detected that each frame button is operated (pressed). In addition, when the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are provided with interlocking means 1125 that can be engaged with both of the frame buttons, the interlocking means 1125 is projected to the engagement position. The second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a. Since the interlocking unit 1125 is configured not to be pressed by the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b, the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a is interlocked with the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b. Absent.

  Next, the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the first frame button 1122a is pressed in the released state where the interlocking means 1125 is buried, and FIG. 82 (b) is an interlocking in which the interlocking means 1125 protrudes. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state which pressed down the 1st frame button 1122a in the state.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), while the interlocking means 1125 is in the released state, the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 are not engaged. The interlocking means 1125 does not move in conjunction with each other. Therefore, the second frame button 1122b is not pressed. On the other hand, while the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 are engaged, so that the first frame button 1122a is pressed. In conjunction with this, the interlocking means 1125 moves downward. Then, the second frame button 1122b engaged with the interlocking means 1125 also moves downward, and it is detected that the pressing operation has been performed by the detection switch S22b.

  Further, the restriction wall 1123 provided around the second frame button 1122b is positioned around the second frame button 1122b even when the second frame button 1122b shown in FIG. 82B is pressed. The lower plate unit 15 is provided so as to protrude inside. Thereby, the return operation for returning the second frame button 1122b from the pressed position (position shown in FIG. 82 (b)) to the normal position (position shown in FIG. 82 (a)) can be made smooth. Moreover, the pressing operation in the one-side grip state when the pressing operation is performed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a can be made smooth.

  In the present embodiment, each frame button (first frame button 1122a, second frame button 1122b) is operated by the player from an initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) where the player has not operated. Although the moving distance to the detected position (see FIG. 82 (b)) is the same, it is described in the frame button input monitoring / production process (see S2107 in FIG. 59) of the first embodiment described above. As described above, since the processing based on the operation of the second frame button 1122b is preferentially executed (see S3002 in FIG. 59), the interlocking unit 1125 enters the interlocking state, and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button When 1122b is simultaneously pressed, an effect based on the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b is executed. Therefore, an effect based on the operation of the operation means (second frame button 1122b) different from the operation means (first frame button 1122a) operated by the player is executed, thereby providing an unexpected effect to the player. can do.

  In the present embodiment, when the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are simultaneously pressed by the control process, an effect based on the second frame button 1122b is executed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the first frame button 1122a is more than the distance by which the first frame button 1122a is moved from the initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82 (b)). The distance for moving the two-frame button 1122b from the initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82 (b)) may be configured to be shorter. As a result, when the interlocking unit 1125 is in the interlocking state and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are pressed simultaneously, the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b is detected first. An effect based on the two-frame button 1122b can be preferentially executed.

  Next, the contents of control for variably controlling the interlocking means 1125 in the second embodiment will be described. The interlocking means 1125 can be variably operated between an interlocking state (protruding state) in which each frame button (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) is engaged and a releasing state (embedded state) in which the engagement is released. Is set so as to be in an interlocked state corresponding to the successful pressing period of the second frame button (release button) 22b set in the pressing period information storage area 223y of the first embodiment described above. The Thereby, in the timing effect (operation effect) of the first embodiment described above, the second frame button (release button) 1122b is pressed at the same timing as the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. Can be made.

  Note that the interlocking unit may be changed to the interlocking state at a timing other than the above-described timing. For example, the player may be able to set the state of the interlocking unit. As a result, can the period during which the player sets the interlocking means in the interlocking state and the display period of the display pointer indicating the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 1122b in the timing effect (operation effect)? Depending on whether or not, it will affect the game result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) using the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing display contents of a timing effect (operation effect). In addition, about the same element as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. As described above, in the second embodiment, the middle button display mode 716 for prompting the user to operate the first frame button (effect button) 1122a and the timing for operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a. A sub display area Ds5 for displaying the suggested display pointer is displayed. That is, in the first embodiment, the display pointer 719 is displayed for each of the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b, and each frame button is displayed to the player. Although it was made to operate, in reality, only a display pointer corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a timing coincident with the bar display unit 717, and a privilege advantageous to the player is given. Therefore, there is a problem that a player who understands the mechanism does not actively participate in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the timing effect (operation effect) of the second embodiment, only the effect of causing the player to operate the first frame button 1122a is executed, and a plurality of display pointers 719 displayed in the effect. Among them, the timing at which one of the display pointers 719 matches the bar display portion 717 coincides with the timing at which the player can enter the ball, and when the display pointer 719 passes near the bar display portion 717, the interlocking unit 1125 is set to the interlocking state. And the first frame button 1122a is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display portion 717, whereby the second frame button 1122b at a timing at which a ball can enter the specific general entrance 630. Can be pressed. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) without grasping which of the display pointers 719 that are scroll-moved and displayed suggests the timing at which the player can enter the ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to operate the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in a state that matches the bar display portion 717 for all the display pointers 719 that are scroll-displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). Players can be actively involved in the game.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the interlocking means 1125 for engaging the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and the interlocking means 1125 are connected to the first frame button 1122a and the first frame button 1122a. Variable control means that can be changed between an interlocking state in which the two-frame button 1122b is engaged and a release state in which the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are in the disengaged state is provided, and the interlocking means 1125 is interlocked. When the player operates the first frame button 1122a while the state is being changed, the second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the operation (pressing operation). Although it is possible to operate the second frame button 1122b without giving a sense of incongruity to the user, another configuration that exhibits the same operational effects as the second embodiment may be used.

  For example, when the interlocking means 1125 is made of a magnetic material and the interlocking means 1125 is in an excited state, a plurality of operating means (the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b) are in an interlocking state in which they operate in an interlocked manner. By setting the interlocking means 1125 to the demagnetized state, a plurality of operating means (the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b) may be configured to be in a release state that does not operate in conjunction with each other. Means capable of switching between the interlocking state and the release state using a structure different from that of the second embodiment may be used. Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, a configuration in which two operation means can be interlocked is used, but three or more operation means may be interlocked, and among the three or more operation means, You may comprise so that control is possible so that the combination of the several operation means used as an interlocking | linkage state may differ. This makes it possible to execute various combinations of operation effects based on operations performed on the operation means performed by the player, so that an unexpected game (effect) can be provided to the player.

  Further, for example, a frame button unit 1022 as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 may be provided as a modification of the second embodiment. The frame button unit 1022 is a unit structure including a second frame button 1022b which is a release button so as to surround the first frame button 1022a which is an effect button.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 according to this modification, a frame button unit 1022 is provided at the center of the lower dish unit 15. Thus, the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used by arranging a plurality of frame buttons (first frame button 1022a, second frame button 1022b) as a unit configuration and arranging them in one place. Can do.

  Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85A is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the player operates the frame button unit 1022, and FIG. 85B is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the frame button unit 1022. FIG. 86A is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (pressed) in a state where the pressing operation of the second frame button 10222b of the frame button unit 1022 is restricted, and FIG. ) Is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (pressed) in a state where the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b in the frame button unit 1022 is released.

  First, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the frame button unit 1022 of the second embodiment, when the player performs a pressing operation, the player's hand is the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b. The first frame button 1022a is formed in a circular shape having a diameter of 5 centimeters so as to be in contact with both, and the second frame button 1022b is formed in an annular shape having a diameter of 7 centimeters in which the first frame button 1022a is included. Yes. That is, the frame button unit 1022 has a circular unit structure with a diameter of 7 cm as a whole.

  Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the frame button unit 1022 is provided so as to protrude to the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side from the viewpoint of FIG. 85 (b)) with respect to the lower dish unit 15. Further, in the frame button unit 1022, the first frame button 1022 a is configured to protrude to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85 (b)) than the second frame button 1022 b. . With this configuration, the first frame button 1022a can be operated (pressed) even when the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted.

  In the pressing direction of the first frame button 1022a (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85B), a detection switch S22a for detecting that the first frame button 1022a has been pressed is provided. In the pressing direction of the button 1022b (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85B), a detection switch S22b for detecting that the second frame button 1022b has been pressed is provided. Further, a restricting member 1023a is provided as a restricting means for restricting a pressing operation in which the second frame button 1022b located in a state where the pressing operation is not performed (normal state) moves to the state where the pressing operation is performed (pressed state). Depending on the operation of the solenoid 1023, which is a general drive source, the position can be varied between a restriction position that restricts the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b and a release position that does not restrict the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b.

  FIG. 85B shows a state in which the regulating member 1023a is located at the regulating position, and the regulating member 1023a regulates the movement of the second frame button 1022b from the normal state to the pressed state. . The restricting member 1023a is made of an elastically changeable material (for example, rubber), and when the restricting member 1023a is located at the restricting position, the restricting member 1023a is located at the release position. Unless the pressing operation is performed with a strong force, the detection switch S22b cannot detect the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b. With this configuration, the second frame button 1022b can always be pressed, but changes the pressing force required for the pressing operation according to the state (depending on the state of the regulating member 1023a). Is possible. Further, regarding the pressing force required for the pressing operation of each frame button, the second frame button 1022b, the first frame button 1022a, and the regulating member 1023a in the state where the regulating member 1023a is located at the release position. The pressing force required for the pressing operation is increased in the order of the second frame button 1022b in the positioned state. Thus, when the second frame button 1022b is in the restricted state, only the first frame button 1022a is easily pressed, and when the second frame button 1022b is in the released state, based on the pressing operation on the first frame button 1022a. This makes it easier to press the second frame button 1022b.

  In this modification, a configuration in which the second frame button 1022b can be constantly pressed is used. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the restriction member 1023a may be made of a material that does not elastically change (for example, metal or metal The second frame button 1022b may be configured not to be pressed when the restricting member 1023a is located at the restricting position.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the distance (first frame button pressing stroke) from when the first frame button 1022a is pressed until it is detected by the detection switch S22a is the second frame button. It is configured to be longer than the distance (second frame button pressing stroke) from when 1022b is pressed until it is detected by the detection switch S22b. Thereby, even if the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted, the pressing operation can be performed on the first frame button 1022a without a sense of incongruity.

  As described above, in each of the embodiments described above, the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) and the second storage device (second storage valve 771a) are used as storage means for storing the sphere in the storage channel 700e. Provided, and the variable operation of the storage means was controlled so that one sphere would flow out (down) each time the second frame button 22b was operated, but storage for storing the sphere in the storage channel 700e. As a means, you may comprise so that only the 1st storage apparatus 770 (1st storage valve 770a) may be provided.

  In this case, when the second frame button 22b is normally operated (normally pressed), the storage device is set so as to be in an open (released) state for a period (for example, 0.2 seconds) in which one ball flows out. When the second frame button 22b is operated and long-pressed, the open (released) state may be continued until all the balls stored in the storage unit flow out. Here, as a method for determining that the second frame button 22b is long pressed, the first pressing operation performs the same process as the normal pressing, and the opening period of the first storage device 770 based on the normal pressing is the same. The operation status of the second frame button 22b is determined again at the end timing, and when the second frame button 22b is continuously pressed at that time, it is good to determine the long press operation. Thus, when it is determined that the continuous pressing for a predetermined period is being executed, the first storage is performed in response to the operation of the second frame button 22b more quickly than when the opening operation of the first storage device 770 is executed. Device 770 can be opened.

  In addition, by using such a configuration, the second frame button 22b can be used to enter all the balls stored in the first storage device 770 into the specific general entrance in the timing effect (operation effect). A player who selects an action to normally operate the player and wishes to make at least one of the balls stored in the first storage device 770 enter the specific general entrance may select the long press operation. It becomes possible, and the production game according to the skill of the player can be executed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as an operation pattern of the movable valve 750, an operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 23A) that can be changed to a plurality of induction states in a short time is provided. Therefore, when the long press operation is selected at the timing when the movable valve 750 executes the operation scenario 3, many spheres can enter the specific general entrance.

  In addition, when providing the frame button 22b which can perform long press operation in this way, you may perform the alerting effect which suggests the timing at which the operation scenario 3 is performed. Thereby, the player can select a normal operation or a long press operation while estimating based on the contents of the notification effect, and can prevent the game from getting bored early.

  In addition, when the frame button 22b is pressed for a long time, the first storage device 770 is controlled to be opened and closed at a specific interval instead of continuously opening (releasing) the first storage device 770. Also good. In this case, the specific interval may be set based on the operation scenario (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750. Thereby, when the 1st ball | bowl which flowed out based on long press operation entered the specific general entrance means, the remaining spheres can be made to flow out at the timing which is easy to enter.

  As described above, in each of the embodiments described above, storage using a storage valve that is variably operated by an electric drive source between a storage state and a release state as a configuration for storing a sphere in the storage channel 700e or the storage channel 700g. Although a device is provided, other configurations may be used, for example, a configuration in which a sphere is stored by magnetic force may be used. In this case, using a variable member that can change a magnetic body having magnetic force to a storage position that approaches the sphere and a release position that moves away from the sphere, or a member (so-called electromagnet) that generates magnetic force when energized, The state and the release state may be variably controlled.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, composition which can change the ball which flowed out from storage means (storage device) into a guidance state which can be guided to a specific entrance means (specific general entrance 630), and a difficult state where guidance is difficult As an example, a movable valve 750 that is variably operated in a projecting position and a buried (retracted) position in a predetermined variable pattern (operation scenario) is provided. Any other configuration may be used as long as it can change between a guiding state that can be guided to the ball means and a difficult state that is difficult to guide, such as a rotating body having a plurality of openings for guiding the ball. When a sphere enters the predetermined opening of the plurality of openings, the sphere is guided to the specific general entrance 630, and when the sphere enters the other opening, the specific general Configured so that the ball is not guided to the entrance 630 The rotating body may be used.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation unit that can be operated by the player uses a frame button that determines that the operation unit has been operated when the player performs a pressing operation. It may be used, and it is possible to determine that the player is operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, lever-shaped operation means that can be determined, or that the player is operated by contact or proximity You may use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating an operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not on the main controller 110 but on the sound lamp controller 113 side.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, of the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that have flown into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700 and did not enter the variable winning device 65 and the second entrance 640 are used for storage. It is configured to flow into the flow path 700e, and it is configured so that about one of the 30 balls launched by the right-handed game flows into the storage flow path 700e. The proportion of the sphere flowing into the storage channel 700e may be determined as appropriate, and the configuration of the right side area of the game board may be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement of the components in the panel unit 700 may be different from those of the above-described embodiments, so that the ratio of flowing into the storage channel 700e may be increased.

  Next, another example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in another example. The gaming board 13 in this different example and the gaming board 13 used in each of the above embodiments are different in the arrangement relationship of the components in the board unit 700 provided in the right side area of the gaming board. Are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the gaming board 13 of this different example, the right-handed position is achieved by the arrangement of the nails provided above the inlet 700a of the board surface unit 700 in the same manner as the gaming board 13 shown in FIGS. About 95% (about 95 out of 100 balls) of the balls launched into the right game area by the game flow into the inflow port 700a of the board surface unit 700, and about 93% of the balls flown into the inflow port (launched by the right-handed game). About 90% of the spheres passed through the through gate 67 and then flow down toward the variable winning device 65.

  Then, when the variable winning device 65 is in the open state (open state), the ball that has flowed down toward the variable winning device 65 enters the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state (closed state). In the case of, it passes through the variable winning device 65 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

  The sphere that has reached the electric combination 640a at the timing when the electric combination 640a is closed flows down on the electric combination 640a in the closed state and flows into the distribution channel 700d (see FIG. 3). An adjustment member (such as a nail) is disposed so that about one of nine spheres that flow into the distribution channel 700d flows into the storage channel 700e. In other words, in the configuration of the game board 13 in this different example, one ball flows into the storage channel 700e in about 10 balls launched into the right game area by the right-handed game (that is, in the board surface unit 700). So that the ball flows into the storage channel 700e by launching a smaller number of balls (10 balls) than the number of prize balls (15 balls) of the specific general entrance 630 (see FIG. 3) provided in It is configured.

  According to the gaming board 13 configured as described above, a right-handed ball can be efficiently entered into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and the variable winning device 65 is closed during the jackpot game. Since the ball passed without entering the variable winning device 65 at the timing (during the interval between rounds) can be efficiently flowed into the storage channel 700e, the jackpot game is advantageously executed by the player. be able to.

  However, when the game board 13 configured as described above is used, a ball is launched toward the right side area of the game board during the normal game, so that the game board 13 can be used for storage as compared with the structure of the game board 13 shown in FIG. Since it becomes easy for a ball to flow into the flow path 700e, there is a possibility that an action of entering the ball into the specific general entrance 630 may be performed during a normal game.

  On the other hand, in this other example, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the cover member 710 is provided so that the movable state of the movable valve 750 is difficult to visually recognize from the outside. Even if a sphere is caused to flow into the storage channel 700e during the game, the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770) so that the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e enters the specific general entrance 630. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the timing at which the 2 storage device 771) is released. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of acquiring a large number of balls by executing a game that causes a ball to enter the specific general entrance 630 during a normal game.

  Further, as described above in each of the above embodiments, the movable valve 750 is configured to move in various operation patterns, so that a game for entering a ball into the specific general entrance 630 during a normal game can be performed. The action of executing and acquiring a large amount of balls can be further suppressed.

  When the game board 13 configured as in this different example is used, the ball stored in the storage channel 700e is a specific general entry when a predetermined condition is satisfied even during the normal game. You may make it alert | report the timing (timing which operates the frame button 22) which cancels | releases a storage device (the 1st storage device 770 and the 2nd storage device 771) so that it may enter into the mouth 630. Specifically, when the lottery result of a special symbol is continuously removed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed since the game was started, When a specific variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern to be executed by the three-symbol display device 81, or a means (for example, a real time clock) capable of determining the current time is provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the current time is predetermined. When the time (for example, noon) is reached, timing notification for notifying the player of the above-described timing may be executed.

  As a result, a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period can be provided to a player who has not won the special symbol jackpot, so that the player can win the game without winning. It can suppress getting tired. Further, the timing notification continuation period from the execution of the timing notification described above to the end thereof may be set to be always a fixed time, or a different time may be set each time. In addition, not only the passage of time as a timing notification termination condition, for example, the completion of a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls entering the specific general entrance 630 during the period in which the timing notification is being executed. It is good also as conditions. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630 during the period in which the timing notification is executed.

  When such timing notification is executed, a game that is advantageous to the player is a right-handed game, so that the right-handed game is guided to the sub display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. "Aim for the right" is displayed as the guidance display. This guidance display is set to be displayed in the sub display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 from a predetermined period before the timing notification is actually executed (for example, 30 seconds before). This is a preparatory notification for the purpose of storing the sphere in the storage channel 700e before the timing notification is executed. Thereby, in the state where timing notification is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a sphere is not stored in the storage flow path 700e.

  Further, whether or not to perform the above-described preparation notification is determined based on the determination result of the determination means (storage upper limit sensor S1, storage detection sensor S2) that determines the presence or absence of a sphere stored on the storage flow path 700e. It is good to decide. Specifically, when the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects a sphere, it may be set so that the preparation notification is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the right-handed game unnecessarily by executing the preparatory notification in a state where a new ball cannot flow into the storage channel 700e. it can. In addition, the period during which the preparation notification is executed may be set as appropriate. For example, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e, or a new inflow into the storage channel 700e (storable) The length of the preparation notification period may be variable based on the number of balls. As a result, in a state in which the timing notification is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a ball is not stored in the storage flow path 700e, and to execute the right-handed game unnecessarily for the player It is possible to suppress this.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration of this other example shown in FIG. 88, the configuration of the game board 13 in which a ball easily flows into the storage channel 700e, specifically, When a ball having a smaller number of balls (for example, 10 balls) than the number of balls to be paid out (for example, 15 balls) when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630, the balls are placed in the storage channel 700e. Even when the inflowable configuration is used, the cover member 710 for making it difficult to visually recognize the operation state of the movable valve 750 from the outside is provided, so that the sphere stored in the storage flow path 700e becomes the specific general entrance 630. It is possible to make it difficult to release the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) at the timing of entering the ball.

  Further, in this example, a ball is put into the storage channel 700e by launching a smaller number of balls (10 balls) than the number of prize balls (15 balls) to be paid out when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630. Since it can be made to flow, a ball is stored in the storage channel 700e during a normal game (that is, a game state in which the variable winning device 65 is not in an open state and the electric accessory 640a is hardly in an open state). Even in the absence of the game, even if the timing notification described above is executed and the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e and then the ball is inserted into the specific general entrance 630, a game advantageous to the player ( A game in which the number of balls to be paid out is larger than the number of hit balls).

  As a result, a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period can be provided to a player who has not won the special symbol jackpot, so that the player can win the game without winning. It can suppress getting tired.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Reservation device release timing is suggested by production)
A game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball, and a special entry that gives a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering Storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is canceled based on an operation on the operation means that can be operated by the ball means, the player, and the operation means And a first state in which a sphere that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the outflowed sphere is the specific entry ball A gaming machine comprising: variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means; and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is released to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a configuration that allows them to flow down. (For example, JP 2006-95235 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to determine the timing at which the player drops the game ball held in the holding device, but the player can be determined according to the timing at which the player determines the game ball to flow down. Since the privilege given to the player cannot be made different, there is a problem that the player cannot be eagerly aimed at the timing of performing the release operation, and the game motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the ball that has flowed out by changing the storage means to the released state by the operation of the operating means has moved to the variable means changed to the first state, it enters the specific entry means. It is configured easily. Thereby, when a game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing that makes it easier to enter the specific entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game motivation is lowered.

  The variable means described above can be changed between the first state and the second state described above in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably operated between the protruding position and the buried position by driving an electric drive source. A possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Moreover, the switching member which switches the flow direction of the sphere to flow down with the sphere which flowed down without using an electric drive source may be used.

  In the gaming machine A1, a storage unit storing a plurality of variable patterns for variably controlling the variable unit by the variable control unit, and one variable pattern from the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine A2 having variable pattern setting means for setting.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the variable means is set and variable by setting one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns, so that the variable pattern is stored in the player and the first state By easily aiming at the timing to become, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that becomes excessively advantageous to the player.

  Here, the storage means storing a plurality of variable patterns means that a plurality of types of variable patterns in which a first period in which the variable means is in the first state and a second period in which the variable state is in the second state are determined are stored. Means. This variable pattern may be a single variable pattern with a minimum unit for changing the variable means. When the same operation is performed a plurality of times in the first period and the second period, the plurality of times The operation may be one variable pattern. In the former case, since one variable pattern is set for one operation of the variable means, the operation of the variable means is set in detail, and the timing at which the variable means enters the first state for the player. Can be difficult to grasp. In the latter case described above, since the execution period of one variable pattern can be extended, the frequency of setting the variable pattern can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A2, the variable pattern setting means repeatedly sets the variable pattern in a predetermined order after power is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the variable pattern after the power is turned on is repeatedly set in a predetermined order, so that one variable pattern is selected in a biased manner, which is advantageous There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that disadvantages are biased.

  Here, after the power is turned on, it means that the gaming machine is turned on and the variable means variable operation is executed, and the variable pattern of the variable means is set in a predetermined order. By doing so, the above-described effects can be achieved.

  In addition, a process for changing the period from when the power is turned on to the gaming machine A3 until the execution of the variable operation of the variable means is started is added to the gaming machine A3, and one variable pattern is selected in a biased manner. You may make it vary the variable operation performed after predetermined time, after turning on a power supply, suppressing a malfunction. In other words, by varying (delaying), for example, a period of 3 seconds after the power is turned on until the execution of the variable operation is started, the variable operation is performed for a period of 3 seconds after the power is turned on. Can be shifted (delayed). Thereby, it is possible to measure the elapsed time since the power is turned on and prevent the timing at which the variable means enters the first state based on the measurement result. In this case, as a method of making the variable operation executed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on, the timing for starting the control for the variable operation is determined by lottery or predetermined in the process executed after the power is turned on. A method may be considered in which the start timings are sequentially executed.

  In the case where a setting order storage means in which the order of setting the variable pattern of the variable means is provided is provided, and the variable pattern is set so as to repeatedly execute the order stored in the setting order storage means When starting the variable operation of the variable means, there may be provided a variable pattern determining means for determining which variable pattern stored in the setting order storage means is set as the variable pattern to be executed first. As a result, it is possible to vary the variable operation executed a predetermined time after the power is turned on, while suppressing the problem that one variable pattern is selected in a biased manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, there are suggested effect execution means for executing an suggested effect that suggests the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player, and a mode of the suggested effect executed by the suggested effect execution means. A suggestion effect mode setting unit that is set based on a variable pattern that is executed by the variable control unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the suggestion effect mode is set based on the variable pattern in which the variable means is variable. There is an effect that it is possible to set the execution of the suggestion effect according to the pattern.

  When the configuration of the gaming machine A4 is used, it is preferable that the timing at which the variable means is in the first state is not predicted by the player. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a shielding member (blindfold member) for making it difficult to visually recognize the variable operation of the variable means. Thereby, instead of directly viewing the variable means, the player can be made aware of the timing at which the variable means is in the first state based on the suggested effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, when the configuration of the gaming machine A2 is provided, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing when the variable means becomes the first state, so that the player is watched for the suggested effect to be executed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine A4, the suggestion effect mode set by the suggestion effect mode setting means is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A4, since the suggestion effect modes are set corresponding to the plurality of variable patterns, the suggestion effect that is advantageous to the player even if the variable pattern is switched. Can be easily executed.

  In addition, as the suggestion effect that suggests the operation timing of the operation means, an effect that causes the moving body to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device, and the timing at which the moving body is positioned at the specific position matches the operation timing, or the effect For example, an effect may be considered in which the timing at which the voice to be executed becomes a predetermined voice matches the operation timing. In this case, it is preferable to use a pre-effect that allows the player to grasp that the operation timing is approaching. Specifically, an effect that moves and displays the moving body on a straight line at a constant speed toward a specific position, or an effect that uses a sound that counts down toward a specific number (for example, 0) may be used. As a result, the timing for operating the operating means can be grasped to some extent in advance, so that the operating means can be appropriately operated even when the operation timing is set for only a short period.

  On the other hand, in order to make it difficult to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player, it is preferable to execute an inhibition effect different from the above-described advance effect. As the inhibition effect, it is conceivable to execute the prior effect at different timings. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the gaming machine A4 or A5 has a determining unit that determines the content of the variable pattern being executed by the variable control unit, and the suggestion effect executing unit has a start timing based on the content determined by the determining unit. A gaming machine A6, which starts the suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the suggestion effect is started at the start timing based on the variable content of the variable pattern that is actually performed. There is an effect that the suggestion effect can be executed.

  Here, the content of the variable pattern includes content information indicating whether or not the variable pattern is a variable pattern advantageous to the player, content information indicating a period during which the variable means is actually in the first state, Content information indicating the remaining period until the pattern is switched can be considered.

  In the gaming machine A6, the variable means has a period determining means for determining a period in which the variable means is in the first state, and the suggestion effect executing means performs the suggestion effect at a timing based on the determination result of the period determination means. A gaming machine A7 characterized by being started.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A6, the suggestion effect is started at a timing based on the result of determining the period of the first state. Therefore, when the operating means is operated, the storing means There is an effect that the suggestion effect can be easily executed at a timing at which the ball that has flowed out of the ball can move to the variable means during the period in which the ball is changed to the first state.

  In any of the gaming machines A3 to A7, the operation timing of the operation means suggested by the suggestion effect is at least one ball that has flowed out of the storage means when the operation means is operated based on the operation timing. Is set so as to be movable to the variable means changed to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A3 to A7, by operating the operating means at the timing based on the suggestion effect, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the specific entry means There is an effect that the interest of operating the operating means can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, based on the variable pattern stored in the storage means, a timing specifying means for specifying a timing at which the variable means changes to the first state, and an outflow from the storage means A period setting means for setting a period until the sphere reached the variable means, and a timing obtained by subtracting the period set by the period setting means from the timing specified by the timing specifying means. The gaming machine A9 is characterized by comprising operation timing setting means for setting the operation timing of the game and suggesting effect execution means for executing an effect suggesting the operation timing set by the operation timing setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing for changing to the first state is specified, and the ball that has flowed out of the storage means reaches the variable means from the specified timing. Since the operation timing is set as the value obtained by subtracting the period until the operation is performed and the performance suggesting the operation timing is executed, the accuracy of the performance suggesting the operation timing can be improved, and the player actively participates in the performance. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine A9, a measurement unit that measures a period until the ball that has flowed out of the storage unit reaches the variable unit, a measurement period measured by the measurement unit, and a period set by the period setting unit A gaming machine A10, comprising: a period discriminating unit for discriminating between and a period correcting unit for correcting the setting contents of the period setting unit based on a discrimination result of the period discriminating unit.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A9, the period until the ball actually arrives can be measured, and the set period can be corrected based on the measurement result. There is an effect that it can be further increased and the player can be enthusiastically participating in the production.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A10, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a ball enters the ball entrance means, and An effect execution means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determination means; and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. The game machine A11 is characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means based on the determination result by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine A11, since the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is executed, the game is identified as a game aiming for the privilege game. It is possible to associate a game that causes a ball to enter the ball entry means and to increase the player's willingness to play.

  Here, as a condition for executing the suggestion effect, for example, when the determination result of the determination unit is a specific determination result of executing the privilege game, or the determination result of the privilege game not being executed (so-called detachment) is predetermined. A case where the number of times continues is conceivable.

  Further, the timing at which the suggestion effect is executed may be a period before the determination result of the determination means is notified to the player, may be a timing at which the determination result is notified, or the determination result is the specific determination result. In this case, it may be during a special game executed after the determination result is notified. If the suggestion effect is executed during the bonus game, it is possible for the player to perform the bonus game and the game in which the specific pitching means enters the ball at the same time, which is more advantageous to the player. A gaming state can be provided.

<Characteristic B group> (execution using cancel operation)
A game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball, and a special entry that gives a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering Storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is canceled based on an operation on the operation means that can be operated by the ball means, the player, and the operation means And a first state in which a sphere that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the outflowed sphere is the specific entry ball A gaming machine comprising: variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means; and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. B1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is released to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a configuration that allows them to flow down. (For example, JP 2006-95235 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to determine the timing at which the player drops the game ball held in the holding device, but the player can be determined according to the timing at which the player determines the game ball to flow down. Since the privilege given to the player cannot be made different, there is a problem that the player cannot be eagerly aimed at the timing of performing the release operation, and the game motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the ball that has flowed out after the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means moves to the variable means that is changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific entry means. It is configured easily. Thereby, when a game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing that makes it easier to enter the specific entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game motivation is lowered.

  The variable means described above can be changed between the first state and the second state described above in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably operated between the protruding position and the buried position by driving an electric drive source. A possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Moreover, the switching member which switches the flow direction of the sphere to flow down with the sphere which flowed down without using an electric drive source may be used.

  In the gaming machine B1, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a ball enters the ball entry means, and a discrimination result by the discrimination means An effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game based on the determination result by the determining means being a specific determination result, the effect executing means Is a game machine B2 that executes a specific effect suggesting that it is the operation timing of the operation means when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, an operation is performed when a predetermined condition is established as an effect for suggesting a discrimination result of a discrimination means for discriminating whether or not a privilege game is executed. Since the specific effect suggesting the operation timing of the means is executed, it is possible to give a bonus game or a specific effect to the player based on the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the storage unit has a storage determination unit that determines that the ball is stored, and the storage determination unit determines that the storage unit stores the ball. A gaming machine B3 that is at least one of the conditions for establishing a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific effect is executed at least when the storage determining unit determines that the ball is stored in the storage unit, and thus the specific effect is suggested. Even when the operation means is operated at the operation timing to be performed, it is possible to suppress the situation where the ball does not flow out of the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the effect executing means is executing an effect for suggesting the specific determination result, an effect for suggesting a determination result different from the specific determination result is provided. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the specific effect is easier to execute than when it is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result in which the bonus game is executed, a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result Since the specific effect is easier to execute than in some cases, it is possible to easily give both the bonus game and the specific effect to the player at a time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the operation timing suggested by the specific performance executed by the performance execution means is at least one ball that has flowed out of the storage means when an operation is executed at the operation timing. Is set so as to be movable to the variable means changed to the second state.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the operation timing at which at least one ball that has flowed out of the storage means reaches the variable means that has been changed to the second state depends on the specific effect. Therefore, when the ball stored in the storage means is caused to flow out of the storage means while the effect suggesting the determination result of the determination means is being executed, the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the effect execution unit notifies information based on a determination result by the determination unit based on an operation of the operation unit during a period in which the specific effect is being executed. A gaming machine B6 that executes a notification effect.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, information based on the determination result of the determination means is obtained based on the operation means being operated during the period during which the specific effect is being executed. Since the notification effect to notify is executed, the player can be watched at the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the action of causing the ball stored in the storage means to flow out of the storage means.

  In the gaming machines B2 to B6, advantageous suggestion effect execution means for executing an advantageous suggestion effect that suggests an operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player during a period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B2 to B6, during the period in which the bonus game is being executed, the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player is suggested by the advantageous suggestion effect. The game value during game execution can be increased, and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

<Characteristic C group> (Movement of the movable valve is difficult to see)
Entry means capable of entering a sphere, a first state in which the sphere can easily enter the entry means, and a second state in which the sphere is less likely to enter the entry means than in the first state. A predetermined condition is established, and a variable means that can be changed to a variable, a switching means that can switch between at least a part of the variable means that is difficult to visually recognize from the outside and an easy state that is easier to visually recognize than the difficult state. In this case, the gaming machine C1 further includes switching control means for switching from the difficult state to the easy state by the switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is provided a variable means that can be varied between an allowable position for allowing a game ball launched on the game board to enter a specific area and a restricting position for restriction. When the ball passes through the variable means in a state in which the ball is in the allowable position, the ball passes through the specific area and gives a privilege to the player. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-083161).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, whether or not a ball enters a specific area is determined by the timing at which the game ball launched on the game board reaches the movable means. It is possible to entertain at what timing the variable means is reached. However, since the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, there is a problem that the act of causing the game ball to reach the variable means in accordance with the timing when the movable means becomes the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operation state of the movable means, the player's willingness to play is reduced by the early detection that the launched game ball will not enter the specific entrance. There was a problem that.

  According to the gaming machine C1, a variable that can be changed between a first state in which the ball easily enters the ball entry means and a second state in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball entry means than in the first state. Since at least a part of the variable state of the means can be switched between a difficult state in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the outside and an easy state in which it is easier to visually recognize than the difficult state, the player does not grasp the state of the variable means A state and a state to be grasped can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be suppressed that the player's willingness to play is reduced by early detection by the player that the launched game ball will not enter the specific entrance. .

  In the gaming machine C1, the switching unit includes a shielding member disposed on the front side of the variable unit, and an irradiating unit capable of irradiating the shielding member with light of a specific color from the back side. The shielding means is configured to be in the difficult state when not irradiated by the irradiation means, and to be changed to the easy state by being irradiated by the irradiation means. Characteristic gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to switch between a difficult state and an easy state by irradiating light by the irradiation unit, and therefore, there is an effect that the switching unit can be easily designed. .

  In the gaming machine C1, the switching unit includes a movable member movable between a front side position of the variable unit and a retracted position retracted from the front side of the variable unit, and the switching control unit includes the movable member. A gaming machine C3 that switches to the difficult state by moving to the front side position and switches to the easy state by moving the movable member to the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, by moving the movable member, it is possible to switch between the difficult state and the easy state, so that the switching means can be easily designed. is there.

  In the gaming machine C1, the switching unit includes a shielding member disposed on the front side of the variable unit, an irradiating unit capable of irradiating light to the shielding member, and the irradiating unit to the shielding member. Variable means for varying the incident angle of the light emitted to the shielding means, wherein the shielding means varies the easy angle by setting the incident angle of the light to the first angle by the variable means. A gaming machine C4 that is configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to change the shielding member to an easy state only by changing the incidence of light on the shielding member, so that the switching means can be easily designed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C4, the variable means is a movable means for moving the shielding member, and the incident angle of the light is set to the first angle by moving the shielding member by the movable means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the shielding member is moved to move each incident of light to the first angle, so that the shielding member can be easily moved without moving the irradiation means. Since it can be made variable, there is an effect that the switching means can be designed easily.

  Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5 has a ball detecting means capable of detecting a sphere flowing down toward the variable means, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the ball detecting means detects the ball. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a predetermined condition is established when it is detected that the ball flows down toward the variable means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the flow cannot be visually recognized.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a ball enters the ball entrance means, and An effect execution means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determination means, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, and the determination means Measuring means for measuring the number of times of determination, and when the number of times of determination in which the determination result of the determination means is continuously a determination result other than the specific determination result is measured a predetermined number of times by the measurement means, A gaming machine C7, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the shielding member can be placed in an easy state when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of consecutive times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being extremely disadvantaged.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C7, a second irradiation unit that emits light different from the irradiation unit, and either the irradiation unit or the second irradiation unit based on the establishment of the first condition Irradiation control means for executing irradiation control, and second condition satisfaction determination means for determining whether a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the first condition, The irradiation control means executes the irradiation control on the irradiation means when the second condition is satisfied, and applies the second irradiation means when the second condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine C8 that performs the irradiation control on the game machine C8.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, when the first condition for executing the irradiation control is satisfied, based on the determination result of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if the shielding member is not brought into an easy state, the irradiation control by the second irradiation means is executed, so that the effect of the light irradiation is reduced. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In addition, by arranging the irradiating unit and the second irradiating unit in the vicinity, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect due to the light irradiation. Further, when the configuration of the gaming machine C8 is used, the content of the irradiation control by the irradiation control unit is made the same, and the switching control for switching only the output destination for executing the control between the irradiation unit and the second irradiation unit can be executed. Good. Thereby, while reducing the control load of an irradiation control means, it can suppress that a presentation effect falls.

<Characteristic D group> (Rhythm game is set to operate the operation means at a specific timing)
A game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball, and a special entry that gives a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering Storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is canceled based on an operation on the operation means that can be operated by the ball means, the player, and the operation means And a first state in which a sphere that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the outflowed sphere is the specific entry ball A gaming machine comprising: variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means; and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. D1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is released to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a configuration that allows them to flow down. (For example, JP 2006-95235 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to determine the timing at which the player drops the game ball held in the holding device, but the player can be determined according to the timing at which the player determines the game ball to flow down. Since the privilege given to the player cannot be made different, there is a problem that the player cannot be eagerly aimed at the timing of performing the release operation, and the game motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the ball that has flowed out by changing the storage means to the released state by the operation of the operation means moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the storage means is entered into the specific entry means. It is configured easily. Thereby, when a game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing that makes it easier to enter the specific entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game motivation is lowered.

  The variable means described above can be changed between the first state and the second state described above in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably operated between the protruding position and the buried position by driving an electric drive source. A possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Moreover, the switching member which switches the flow direction of the sphere to flow down with the sphere which flowed down without using an electric drive source may be used.

  In the gaming machine D1, among the effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect whose effect mode is varied according to the operation on the operation means, and the operation effect executed by the effect execution means, the operation is performed within a specific period. When the means is operated, the production mode variable means for changing the production mode to the specific production mode, the specific timing setting means for setting the specific timing based on the state of the variable means varied by the variable control means, And an operation effect setting means for setting the specific period in the operation effect based on the specific timing set by the specific timing setting means when a specific condition is satisfied. D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the effect execution means executes an operation effect whose effect mode is changed according to the operation corresponding to the operation means, and the operation means is operated during the operation effect. Since the specific period in which the effect mode is changed to the specific effect mode based on the operation can be set by the specific timing set based on the state of the variable means, the operation effect and the state of the variable means can be set. It becomes possible to associate. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation means can be operated eagerly by the player.

  In the gaming machine D2, the specific timing is a timing at which at least one ball that has flowed out of the storage means can be moved to the variable means that has been changed to the first state when the operation means is operated. A gaming machine D3, which is set in (1).

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, when the operating means is operated, the timing at which at least one ball that has flowed out of the storage means can move to the variable means that has been changed to the first state is the specific timing. Therefore, by operating the operation means so as to change the effect mode to the specific effect mode in the operation effect, the ball stored in the storage unit can be easily entered into the specific ball entry unit. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the operation effect and the player's game motivation can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, an operation discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not the operating unit has been operated within the specific period, a storage unit that stores information updated based on a discrimination result of the operation discriminating unit, A gaming machine D4, comprising: frequency variable means for varying the frequency of establishment of the specific condition based on the information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the establishment frequency of the specific condition is varied depending on whether or not the operating means is operated within a specific period in the operation effect. Can actively participate in the operation production. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect effect of the operation effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, it is desirable to increase the frequency of establishment of the specific condition as the number of times the operating means is operated within the specific period set during the operation effect increases. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means within a specific period, and the effect effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, a second operation means different from the operation means is provided, and the operation effect executed by the effect execution means depends on an operation on the operation means or the second operation means. The gaming machine D5, wherein the production mode is variable.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the operation means that can be operated by the operation effect can be increased, so that the effect effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the operation effect executed by the effect execution unit is set with the specific period based on a predetermined music, and corresponds to the progress of the predetermined music. Specific period settable area storage means in which a plurality of specific period settable areas in which the specific period can be set is stored, and the plurality of specific period settable areas stored in the specific period settable area storage means, A matching part determining unit that determines a part that matches the specific timing; and a specific period setting unit that sets the specific period of the operation effect at a part that is determined to match by the matching part determining unit. A gaming machine D6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D6, in the operation effect in which the specific period is set based on the music, the specific period of the operation effect is set at a position where the specific period settable area corresponding to the progress of the music matches the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operating means at a specific timing using a specific period corresponding to the music used for the operation effect, and there is an effect that the effect effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced.

<Feature E group> (Operation effect is corrected based on the ball flow situation)
A sphere path through which the sphere can pass, a sphere passage detecting means for detecting that the sphere has passed through a specific position in the sphere path, and the sphere passage detecting means after detecting a predetermined condition. A period setting means for setting a first period as a period until the notification, a notification timing setting means for setting a notification timing for notifying a specific effect mode based on the first period set in the period setting means, An effect notification means for notifying the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means, and a period specification for specifying a passage period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the ball passage detection means detects the sphere Means, a period determining means for determining the passage period specified by the period specifying means, and the first period set by the period setting means, and the period determining means That determination based on the result, the period duration to correct the first period set in the setting means correcting means and characterized by having a game machine E1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that executes an effect corresponding to the period during which the game ball flows down in order to inform the player of the flow-down situation of the game ball in an easy-to-understand manner. A variable means is provided that can be varied between an allowable position for allowing a game ball launched into the effect game board for a predetermined period at a specific timing to enter the specific entrance and a restricting position for restricting. In some cases, when the ball passes through the variable means in the allowable position, the ball enters the specific entrance and gives a privilege to the player. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2011-233501).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, whether or not a ball enters the specific entrance is determined by the timing at which the game ball launched on the game board reaches the movable means. The timing at which the game ball reaches the movable means can be enjoyed. However, since the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, there is a problem that the act of causing the game ball to reach the variable means in accordance with the timing when the movable means becomes the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operation state of the movable means, the player's willingness to play is reduced by the early detection that the launched game ball will not enter the specific entrance. There was a problem that.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the first period that is referred to when the notification timing for notifying the specific effect mode is set can be corrected based on the passage period in which the sphere actually passes. It is possible to easily match the situation and the execution situation of the specific effect mode. Thereby, there exists an effect that a production effect can be heightened.

  Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine E1 is used for a gaming machine in which an effect for suggesting whether or not a ball passes a specific ball path as a specific effect mode, Suppressing a problem that an effect for suggesting that the sphere passes the specific sphere route is executed after the sphere has passed the specific sphere route because the notification timing of the specific effect mode is shifted. Can do.

  In the gaming machine E1, the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that a ball passes through the specific position.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the timing at which an effect suggesting that the ball passes through the specific position can be corrected according to the period during which the ball actually passes. There is an effect that the production effect can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine E1 or E2 includes ball passage determining means for determining that the ball has passed a predetermined position upstream of the specific position in the ball path, and the ball passage determining means The game machine E3 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that a ball has passed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, a notification timing that is set in advance based on a period from when the ball passes a predetermined position until it passes a specific position in the ball path. Since it can correct | amend based on the passage period of an actual ball | bowl, there exists an effect that a production effect can be heightened.

  In the gaming machine E3, the case where the ball has passed the predetermined position is shown as an opportunity for the establishment of the predetermined condition. However, as a method for determining that the ball has passed, the actual passage of the ball is detected (for example, proximity In addition to the method of detecting by a sensor, for example, a method of detecting that a regulating member that regulates the flow of a sphere toward a predetermined position has changed from a regulated position to a release position that releases the regulation can be considered. In this case, even if the restricting member is changed to the release position, the ball does not always flow downward toward the predetermined position. For example, the ball is allowed to flow toward the predetermined position upstream of the restricting member. It is preferable to use a method for determining that the restricting member has been changed to the release position in a state where a staying means for staying is provided and a ball is staying in the staying means. Even if such a method is used, it is possible to indirectly determine that the ball has passed the predetermined position, and the same effect as the gaming machine E3 can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine E3, the ball path includes a first ball path in which the specific position is provided, and a second ball path that branches from the first ball path in a section between the predetermined position and the specific position. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine E3, there is a possibility that the ball that has passed through the predetermined position may pass through the second ball path without passing through the specification, so that the player can determine which ball path the ball actually passes through. It is possible to entertain and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E4, the ball path is divided into a first state in which a ball passing through the ball path easily passes through the first ball path and a second state in which the ball passes through the second ball path more easily than the first state. Based on the variable means that can change the path state of the ball and the path state of the ball path that is variable by the variable means, is the path state that the sphere that has passed the predetermined position can pass the first spherical path? A path state determination unit that determines whether the sphere that has passed the predetermined position is a path state in which the sphere that has passed the predetermined position can pass through the first ball path. In addition, the gaming machine E5 is characterized by notifying the specific effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine E5, when the ball is in a state in which the ball can pass through the specific position, the specific effect mode is notified, so that the player passes the specific position by notifying the specific effect mode. Therefore, it can be expected that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, if the predetermined first period and the period actually spent for passing the sphere from the predetermined position to the specific position are different, the specific effect mode is notified, Although the trouble that the situation where the ball does not pass through the first ball path occurs frequently occurs, according to the gaming machine E5, based on the period of time required for the ball to actually pass from the predetermined position to the specific position. Since the first period can be corrected, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific effect mode can be increased and the effect of the effect can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, a second ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed the second specific position in the second ball path, and the ball has passed the predetermined position. Second period specifying means for specifying a second passage period until the second ball passage detecting means detects the second passage period, and the period determining means includes a previous passing period and the second passing period, A gaming machine E6 that distinguishes from the first period.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E3 to E5, it is possible to correct the first period using the period required to pass through the second ball passage, so that it passes through the first ball passage. Compared to the case where the first period is corrected based only on the sphere, the information for correcting the first period can be increased, and the correction accuracy can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific performance mode can be increased and the performance effect can be increased.

  In the configuration of the gaming machine E6, the second specific position may be provided at a location that requires the same period as the period required for the ball to pass from the predetermined position to the specific position. Thereby, the information regarding the passage period specified by the period specifying means and the information about the second passage period specified by the second period specifying means can be collected without being separated, and the control load can be reduced. There is an effect that can be done.

  Further, in the gaming machine E6, the period determining unit is configured to use the passage period and the second passage period, but may be configured to use only the second passage period.

<Feature F group> (A plurality of operation means can be operated by the same operation)
A first operating means that can be operated by the player, a first determining means that determines that the first operating means has been operated, and a second operating means that is different from the first operating means that can be operated by the player. An effect that executes a predetermined effect based on the result of determination by the operating means, the second determining means for determining that the second operating means has been operated, and the first determining means or the second determining means In the gaming machine having the execution means, the linkage means for variably operating the second operation means in conjunction with the variable action of the first operation means, and the linkage means for the first operation means Variable control means for changing between a linked state in which the second operating means is linked and a released state in which the connected state is released, and the variable control means is configured to switch the linked means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It can be changed to the interlocked state Gaming machine F1, characterized in that it.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation effect based on the operation of each operation means is executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-55481).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, an operation effect is executed when a player operates an operation means corresponding to the effect among a plurality of operation means. Of these, it is necessary to select and operate the corresponding operation means, and there is a problem that the willingness to operate the operation means is reduced. In addition, by operating one operation means among the plurality of operation means, an effect corresponding to the operation on the one operation means is executed, and therefore providing an unexpected effect to the player There was a problem that could not.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the player operates the first operation means, either the effect based on the determination result of the first determination means or the effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the same effect as when a plurality of operation means are operated only by operating one operation means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate the operation means. is there.

  In addition, when the first operating means is operated, an effect based on the determination result of the second determining means can be executed, so that an unexpected effect can be provided to the player, and the effect There is an effect that can be increased.

  In the gaming machine F1, when the first operation means is operated in a state where the interlocking means is changed to the interlocking state by the variable control means, the effect executing means is determined by the second determining means. A gaming machine F2 that executes the predetermined performance based on the result.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, by changing the interlocking means to the interlocking state, when the first operating means is operated, an effect based on the determination result of the second determining means is executed. Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F2, the first operating means and the second operating means are configured to be movable from a first position to a second position, and the first determining means and the second determining means are: The first operation means or the second operation means corresponding to each of them is moved to the second position, and the first operation means is moved from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the distance by which the second operating means is moved from the first position to the second position is shorter than the distance to be moved.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F2, the second operating means has a shorter distance until it is determined that the operation has been performed than the first operating means. In the interlocked state, it is possible to reliably execute an effect based on the determination result of the second determination means when the first operation means is operated. Therefore, there is an effect that an unexpected effect can be executed with a simple configuration.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the interlocking means is provided inside a gaming machine that is difficult to visually recognize from the outside.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the interlocking means is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize from the outside, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the state of the interlocking means. Can do. Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a player is based on a game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the ball that has entered, and the game ball entering The storage means is changed from a storage state in which the sphere can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on an operation with respect to the specific entry means to which a privilege advantageous to the operation is given and the second operation means. A storage control means, a first state in which a sphere that has flowed out of the storage means by being changed to the released state by the storage control means is easy to enter the specific entry means, and A gaming machine F5 having variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the first operation means is operated, the storage control means may change from the storage state to the release state. On the other hand, it is possible to provide an unexpected game and enhance the production effect.

  In the gaming machine F5, the timing setting means for setting the operation timing of the second operation means that allows the ball that has flowed out of the storage means to easily enter the specific entry means, and the operation timing set by the timing setting means And an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for operating the first operation means based on the game machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F5, it is possible to cause the specific entry means to enter the ball by operating the first operation means according to the operation effect that operates the first operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically participate in the operation effect.

  In the gaming machine F6, the operation effect is an effect in which an operation timing for operating the first operation means is notified a plurality of times, and at least one of the operation timings notified in the plurality of times is the timing setting means. The gaming machine F7, which is the operation timing set by the above.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F6, any one of the plurality of operation timing notifications executed during the operation effect of the second operation means that can easily enter the specific entry means. Since the operation timing can be suggested, the first operation means can be operated with respect to all of the plurality of operation timings executed during the operation effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic G group> (Advance notification of the state in which the movable valve is advantageous)
A game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball, and a special entry that gives a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering Storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is canceled based on an operation on the operation means that can be operated by the ball means, the player, and the operation means And a first state in which a sphere that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the outflowed sphere is the specific entry ball A gaming machine comprising: variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means; and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. G1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is released to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a configuration that allows them to flow down. (For example, JP 2006-95235 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to determine the timing at which the player drops the game ball held in the holding device, but the player can be determined according to the timing at which the player determines the game ball to flow down. Since the privilege given to the player cannot be made different, there is a problem that the player cannot be eagerly aimed at the timing of performing the release operation, and the game motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine G1, when the ball that has flowed out by changing the storage means to the released state by the operation of the operating means has moved to the variable means changed to the first state, it enters the specific entry means. It is configured easily. Thereby, when a game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing that makes it easier to enter the specific entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game motivation is lowered.

  The variable means described above can be changed between the first state and the second state described above in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably operated between the protruding position and the buried position by driving an electric drive source. A possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Moreover, the switching member which switches the flow direction of the sphere to flow down with the sphere which flowed down without using an electric drive source may be used.

  In the gaming machine G1, the variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means includes at least a first period during which the variable means is likely to be in the first state and the variable means more than the first period. Has a second period in which it is difficult to enter the first state, a period determining means for determining the timing at which the first period is set as variable control of the variable means by the variable control means, and the period determining means A gaming machine G2 comprising: a specific performance executing means for executing a specific performance when the timing at which the first period is set is determined.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, by causing the specific effect to be executed, the player can grasp that the first period during which the variable means is likely to be in the first state is set. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In the gaming machine G2, when a predetermined condition is established, the gaming machine G2 includes an advantageous suggestion effect execution unit that executes an advantageous suggestion effect that suggests an operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player, and the specific effect execution unit includes: The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed during a period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the advantage suggesting effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, it is possible to notify the player that there is a possibility that the current advantageous suggestion effect is being executed during the first period. There is an effect that the game can be performed eagerly.

  In the gaming machine G3, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect when the first period is set within the period in which the advantage suggesting effect is executed. Machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G3, it is possible to notify the player that the current advantageous suggestion effect will be executed during the first period. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the storage unit has a storage determination unit that determines whether the storage unit stores a ball, and the specific effect execution unit is at least configured to store the ball by the storage determination unit. When it is determined that the game is stored, the specific effect can be executed.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the specific effect is executed only when a ball is stored in the storage means. Can be operated. Further, since the specific effect is prohibited from being executed in a state where the ball is not stored in the storage means, the specific effect is executed unnecessarily, and the player can grasp the variable pattern of the variable member. There is an effect that this can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a ball enters the ball entrance means, and An effect execution means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determination means; and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. The game machine G6 is characterized in that the specific effect execution means executes a specific fusion effect that informs that the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result as the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G2 to G5, it is possible to execute an effect that combines the fact that the bonus game is executed and the fact that the first period is set. It is possible to notify that a different gaming state is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed while giving the player a sense of expectation.

  In any one of the gaming machines G2 to G6, the specific effect executing unit changes the notification mode for notifying the operation timing of the operation unit that is advantageous to the player suggested during the advantage suggesting effect to the specific notification mode. A gaming machine G7 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, it is possible to notify the player that the first period is set by the notification mode during the advantageous suggestion effect, so the effect of the effect There is an effect that can be increased.

<Characteristic H group> (The difficulty level of the release suggestion can be selected)
A game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball, and a special entry that gives a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering Storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is canceled based on an operation on the operation means that can be operated by the ball means, the player, and the operation means And a first state in which a sphere that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the outflowed sphere is the specific entry ball A gaming machine comprising: variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means; and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. H1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is released to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a configuration that allows them to flow down. (For example, JP 2006-95235 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to determine the timing at which the player drops the game ball held in the holding device, but the player can be determined according to the timing at which the player determines the game ball to flow down. Since the privilege given to the player cannot be made different, there is a problem that the player cannot be eagerly aimed at the timing of performing the release operation, and the game motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine H1, when the ball that has flowed out by changing the storage means to the release state by the operation of the operation means moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the storage means is entered into the specific entry means. It is configured easily. Thereby, when a game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing that makes it easier to enter the specific entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game motivation is lowered.

  The variable means described above can be changed between the first state and the second state described above in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably operated between the protruding position and the buried position by driving an electric drive source. A possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Moreover, the switching member which switches the flow direction of the sphere to flow down with the sphere which flowed down without using an electric drive source may be used.

  In the gaming machine H1, based on a variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means, an advantageous suggestion effect execution means for executing an advantageous suggestion effect that suggests the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player; The selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means, and the effect of setting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means And an aspect setting means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, and therefore, the advantage suggestion effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. Thus, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H2, the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means can suggest the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player a plurality of times, and the effect mode setting means includes: Based on the effect mode selected by the selection means, the suggestion number setting means for setting the suggestion number of the advantage suggestion effect, and the suggestion suggestion effect based on the suggestion number set by the suggestion number setting means. A gaming machine H3, characterized by having suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2, the number of suggestion and the suggestion modes of the effect suggestion effect are set based on the effect mode selected by the selection means. There is an effect that the selection means can be selected.

  In the gaming machine H3, when the suggestion number setting means sets the suggestion number equal to or more than a predetermined number, the suggestion aspect set by the suggestion aspect setting means is based on the first aspect in which the player can visually recognize the suggestion aspect. However, the gaming machine H4 is characterized in that a second mode that is more difficult to visually recognize than the first mode is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H3, the operation means is operated at the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player when the selection means selects an effect mode in which many suggestion times are set. The second mode in which it is difficult to operate is set. Thereby, for the player, whether or not to select an effect mode corresponding to the number of suggestions less than the predetermined number of times and execute an advantageous suggestion effect in which the first mode is easily set. It is possible to select an effect mode corresponding to the number of suggestions equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, and to select whether to execute an advantageous suggestion effect in which the second mode is easily set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select an advantageous suggestion effect according to his / her skill and can participate in the effect eagerly.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, when the suggestion count is set to be greater than or equal to a predetermined number by the suggestion count setting means, the suggestion mode setting means is more than when the suggestion count less than the predetermined count is set. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that a short interval is easily set as the interval at which the suggestion mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3 or H4, when an effect mode in which a large number of suggestions are set is selected by the selection means, an effect mode in which the number of suggestions less than a predetermined number is set. Since it is easier to set a short interval as the interval at which the suggestion mode is set, the player can select an advantageous suggestion effect that matches his skill, and actively participate in the effect There is an effect that can be made.

  In any of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the operation content determination means for determining the operation content of the operation means while the advantageous suggestion effect is being executed, and the operation content determined by the operation content determination means are: A game machine H6, comprising: an effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect to a special effect mode advantageous to the player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the special suggestion mode that is advantageous to the player based on the operation content for the operating means during the suggestion suggestion Therefore, there is an effect that the operation means can be operated eagerly by the player.

  In the gaming machine H6, the operation content determination means determines the number of times the operation means has been operated at the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player, and the operation content determination means The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that when the number of operations reaches the predetermined number of times, the effect mode changing means changes the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect to the special effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H6, based on the number of times the operating means is operated at an appropriate timing, the effect mode of the effect suggesting effect can be changed to a special effect mode advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation means can be operated more eagerly by the player.

<Characteristic group I> (valve monitoring on the sub side)
A game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball, and a special entry that gives a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering Storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is canceled based on an operation on the operation means that can be operated by the ball means, the player, and the operation means And a first state in which a sphere that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the outflowed sphere is the specific entry ball A gaming machine comprising: variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means; and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. I1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is released to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a configuration that allows them to flow down. (For example, JP 2006-95235 A). In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to determine the timing at which the player drops the game ball held in the holding device, but the player can be determined according to the timing at which the player determines the game ball to flow down. Since the privilege given to the player cannot be made different, there is a problem that the player cannot be eagerly aimed at the timing of performing the release operation, and the game motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine I1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means and the spilled ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, it is entered into the specific entry means. It is configured easily. Thereby, when a game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing that makes it easier to enter the specific entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game motivation is lowered.

  The variable means described above can be changed between the first state and the second state described above in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably operated between the protruding position and the buried position by driving an electric drive source. A possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Moreover, the switching member which switches the flow direction of the sphere to flow down with the sphere which flowed down without using an electric drive source may be used.

  The gaming machine I1 includes a main control unit that executes control of the game, and a sub control unit that executes control of the game based on a control signal from the main control unit. Storage control means, variable control means, variable control information generating means for generating variable control information for notifying the slave control means of the control content of the variable control means, the slave control means, Display means for executing a predetermined effect; variable information storage means for storing variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled; and the output from the main control means Based on the variable control information, using the variable information stored in the variable information storage means, the variable control status specifying means for specifying the variable control status of the variable means, and the variable control status specifying means Based on the set variable control situation, it has an effect setting means for setting an effect to be displayed on the display means, and an effect executing means for executing the effect set by the effect setting means. Characteristic gaming machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the secondary control means is output from the main control means when performing an effect based on the variable status of the variable means variably controlled by the main control means. Since the effect is executed based on the variable control information and the variable information stored in the variable information storage means of the slave control means, the control load of the main control means can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine I2, the variable control information generating means includes at least start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means in the variable control information generated first after the gaming machine is powered on. A gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2, the variable control information that is first generated after the gaming machine is turned on includes start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the accuracy of specifying the variable control situation by the sub control means.

  In the gaming machine I3, the main control unit has an operation start period setting unit capable of setting a different period as an operation start period from when power is turned on to the gaming machine until the variable unit starts the variable operation. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I3, it is possible to vary the period from when the gaming machine is turned on until the variable means starts variable operation. This makes it possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable motion.

  In the gaming machines I2 to I4, the main control means is configured to store storage means for storing a plurality of variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means, and when the game machine is powered on. Initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern to be executed first from among the plurality of variable patterns, and the variable control means preliminarily stores the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. The variable control information generation means is set at least by the initial variable pattern setting means in the variable control information generated first after power is turned on to the gaming machine. A gaming machine I5 including initial variable pattern setting information.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, even if the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, When the power is turned on, the variable pattern to be executed first can be set from among a plurality of variable patterns, so that it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means. There is an effect that can be done. Further, since the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the processing load of the variable control can be reduced.

<Characteristic J group> (in the operation effect that operates the operation means a predetermined number of times, the player can select the operation interval)
A game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball, and a special entry that gives a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering Storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is canceled based on an operation on the operation means that can be operated by the ball means, the player, and the operation means And a first state in which a sphere that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific entry means by being changed to the released state by the storage control means, and the outflowed sphere is the specific entry ball A gaming machine comprising: variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means; and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. J1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is released to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a configuration that allows them to flow down. (For example, JP 2006-95235 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to determine the timing at which the player drops the game ball held in the holding device, but the player can be determined according to the timing at which the player determines the game ball to flow down. Since the privilege given to the player cannot be made different, there is a problem that the player cannot be eagerly aimed at the timing of performing the release operation, and the game motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the ball that has flowed out by changing the storage means to the released state by the operation of the operation means moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the storage means enters the specific entry means. It is configured easily. Thereby, when a game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing that makes it easier to enter the specific entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game motivation is lowered.

  The variable means described above can be changed between the first state and the second state described above in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably operated between the protruding position and the buried position by driving an electric drive source. A possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Moreover, the switching member which switches the flow direction of the sphere to flow down with the sphere which flowed down without using an electric drive source may be used.

  In the gaming machine J1, based on a variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means, an advantageous suggestion effect executing means for executing an advantageous suggestion effect that suggests an operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player; The selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means, and the effect of setting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means And a game machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantage suggestion effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. Thus, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J2, the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means notifies the operation timing of the operation means at a predetermined interval, and is a notification interval for notifying the operation timing of the operation means. , And an interval setting unit capable of setting a first interval and a second interval whose notification interval is shorter than the first interval, and the selection unit is at least the first interval as an effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect. A gaming machine J3 that is capable of selecting a first effect mode corresponding to the interval and a second effect mode corresponding to the second interval.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the length of the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified can be changed by selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect by the selection means. Thereby, since the player can select the production mode corresponding to the operation interval according to his / her skill, he / she can actively participate in the production using the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine J3 includes display means for displaying the advantageous suggestion effect, and selection display control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of the effect modes that can be selected by the selection means as the selection screen. The display control means causes the display means to display the notification interval corresponding to the plurality of selectable presentation modes, and the gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are produced. That is, from the plurality of presentation modes displayed on the display unit, one selection mode can be selected by the selection unit after grasping the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation unit is notified. Thereby, since the player can easily select the production mode in which the operation timing is notified at the intended notification interval, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game and enhance the interest of the game. is there.

  In the gaming machine J4, the selection display control means displays frequency information indicating the number of times that the operation timing of the operation means is notified in correspondence with the plurality of effect modes. J5.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J4, the following effects are achieved. That is, from the plurality of presentation modes displayed on the display unit, one selection mode can be selected by the selection unit after grasping the number of times the operation unit should be operated. Accordingly, when the number of operations is small, the notification interval for notifying the operation timing of the operation means is shortened, and when the number of operations is large, the notification interval for notifying the operation timing of the operation means is lengthened. It is possible to easily select a combined production mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can actively participate in the game.

  Any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Sound lamp control device (an example of sub control means)
114 Display control device (an example of slave control means)
223s movable valve state storage area (variable information storage means)
630 Specific general entrance (specific entry means)
750 Movable valve (variable means)
S1008 Storage control means S1009 Variable control means S1202 Second determination means S1406 Variable control information generation means S2306 Variable control status identification means S2111 Production setting means

Claims (5)

A game area where the ball can flow down,
A storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the ball that has entered,
Specific entry means that gives a privilege advantageous to the player based on the entry of the game ball;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Based on an operation on the operation means, a storage control means for changing the storage means from a storage state in which a sphere can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released,
A first state in which the sphere that has flowed out of the storage means easily enters the specific entry means by being changed to the released state by the storage control means, and the outflowed sphere enters the specific entry means. Variable means that can be changed to a second state that is difficult to enter;
And a variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. Main control means for executing control of the game;
Subordinate control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means,
The main control means includes
The storage control means;
The variable control means;
Variable control information generating means for generating variable control information for notifying the slave control means of the control content of the variable control means,
The slave control means includes
Display means for executing a predetermined effect;
Variable information storage means storing variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled;
Based on the variable control information output from the main control means, using the variable information stored in the variable information storage means, variable control status specifying means for specifying the variable control status of the variable means,
An effect setting means for setting an effect to be displayed on the display means based on the variable control situation specified by the variable control situation specifying means;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: an effect execution means for executing the effect set by the effect setting means.   The variable control information generation means includes at least start timing information for starting a variable operation of the variable means in the variable control information generated first after power is turned on to the gaming machine. Item 3. The gaming machine according to Item 2.   The main control means includes an operation start period setting means capable of setting a different period as an operation start period from when the gaming machine is powered on until the variable means starts the variable operation. The gaming machine according to claim 3. The main control means includes
Storage means for storing a plurality of variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means;
Initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern to be executed first from among the plurality of variable patterns when the gaming machine is powered on,
The variable control means repeatedly executes the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means in a predetermined order.
The variable control information generating means includes at least the initial variable pattern setting information set by the initial variable pattern setting means in the variable control information generated first after power is turned on to the gaming machine. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4.

Images